The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutB09-0321 project manual (mechanical and electrical) volume 2 of 2PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 2 OF 2 501-- O.S-p 2 I r! g MAR 0 8 WO First Chair TOWN OF VAIL Vail, Colorado Town of Vall , ki j � ' Permit Set + A= i4opy October 30, 2009 �,; .� -� ",k ..� \ a> ap °,„ rte' ,, :e C J OZ Archie #ur+ 1805 29th Street ulte' , Addendum #2- M `j 1 2 nc1 A Permit Set Resubmittal � � Addendum #1- March 4, 2010 ; ,es Boulder, Color OZ Project No. 170 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 DOCUMENT 00001 - TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 GENERAL INFORMATION 00001 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00002 PROJECT DIRECTORY SERIES 00 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS 00330 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND REPORTING DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 SUMMARY 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01420 REFERENCES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 DIVISION 02 — SITEWORK 02220 SITE DEMOLITION 02300 EARTHWORK 02370 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION 02518 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02530 SANITARY SEWERAGE 0258.0 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION, CONDUITS AND GAS SYSTEMS 02630 STORM DRAINAGE 02720 UNBOUND BASE COURSE 02740 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02750 RIGID PAVEMENT 02751 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02752 CONCRETE PAVING CURING 02810 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02840 PARKING ACCESSORIES 02920 SOIL PREPARATION 02950 PLANTINGS 02960 SEEDING AND SODDING DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03541 GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT DIVISION 04— MASONRY 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04860 STONE MASONRY DIVISION 05 — METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05310 STEEL DECK 05400 COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05511 METAL STAIRS 05532 ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS 05721 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO vi FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06130 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06150 WOOD DECKING 06160 SHEATHING 06176 METAL - PLATE - CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06185 STRUCTURAL GLUED - LAMINATED TIMBER 06201 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06640 PLASTIC PANELING DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07141 COLD FLUID - APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142 HOT FLUID - APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07180 CONCRETE SEALERS 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07260 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDERS 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS 07460 SIDING 07552 STYRENE - BUTADIENE - STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07725 ROOF ICE MELT SYSTEMS 07811 SPRAYED FIRE - RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07841 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07842 FIRE - RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07920 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08141 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08215 HOLLOW CORE WOOD DOORS 08263 SLIDING WOOD - FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08411 ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08550 WOOD WINDOWS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 DIVISION 09 — FINISHES 09111 NON- LOAD - BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09310 CERAMIC TILE 09651 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09680 CARPET 09681 CARPET TILE 09911 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING 09920 PAVEMENT MARKING 09960 HIGH - PERFORMANCE COATINGS DIVISION 10 —SPECIALTIES 10201 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10310 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10431 SIGNAGE 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10605 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES DIVISION 11 —EQUIPMENT 11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS 12356 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13852 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 13865 RADIO AMPLIFICATION SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL OZ Architecture PI 00001-4 Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 VOLUME 2 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15145 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15155 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15165 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING 15195 FACILITY NATURALGAS PIPING 15300 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15446 SUMP PUMPS 15450 POTABLEWATER STORAGE TANKS 15513 CONDENSING BOILERS 15515 WATERTUBE BOILERS 15550 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15555 DRAFT CONTROL DEVICES 15762 UNIT HEATERS 15763 FANCOIL UNITS 15764 CONVECTION HEATING UNITS 15815 METAL DUCTS 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES 15838 POWER VENTILATORS 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001-6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16231 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16441 SWITCHBOARDS 16442 PANELBOARDS 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16714 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 16716 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 16717 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING END OF DOCUMENT 00001 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001-8 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 DOCUMENT 00002 - PROJECT DIRECTORY Owner Vail Resorts Development Company 137 W. Benchmark Road Avon, CO 81620 (303 754 -2371 Fax (303) 754 -2792 Architect OZ Architecture of Boulder, Inc. 1805 29th Street, Suite 2054 Boulder, CO 80301 (303) 449 -8900 Fax (303) 449 -3886 Civil Engineer Alpine Engineering 34520 Highway 6 Unit A -9 Edwards, CO 81632 (970) 926 -3373 Fax (970) 926 -3390 Am Structural Engineer Monroe & Newell Engineers, Inc. 70 Benchmark Road Suite 204 Avon, CO 81620 (970) 949 -7768 Fax (970) 949 -4054 Mechanical/ Electrical Engineer Beaudin Ganze Consulting Engineers, Inc. 110 East Beaver Creek Boulevard Suite 202 Avon, CO 81620 (970) 949 -6108 Fax (970) 949 -6159 Landscape Architect MAC Design P.O. Box 6446 Avon, CO 81620 (970) 977 -0016 Arok PROJECT DIRECTORY 00002-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 Preconstruction and Contractor Services R.A. Nelson & Associates, Inc. 51 Eagle Road, #2 P.O. Drawer 5400 Avon, Colorado 81620 (970) 949 -5152 Fax: (970) 949 -4379 END OF DOCUMENT 00002 PROJECT DIRECTORY 00002-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 15010 — MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further instructions and be governed by the requirements thereunder. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included Furnish all labor and materials and perform all operations necessary for the installation of complete and operating mechanical systems subject to the conditions of the contract. The work also includes the completion of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all systems; this includes the furnishing of all materials for filling systems to make them operable, including water, refrigerant, oil, grease, antifreeze and brine. Prove satisfactory operation of all equipment and controls to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER on request. B. Work Not Included Certain labor and materials may be furnished and /or installed under other divisions of these specifications. Coordinate with other trades and arrange the work to make the parts fit together. The following items are to be accomplished under other divisions of these specifications. a. Temporary Heat: See Paragraph 1.7, this Section and Division 1. b. Roof Curbs: See Paragraph 3.9, this Section. C. Concrete: See paragraph 3.10, this Section. d. Electrical Equipment and Wiring: See paragraph 3.11, this section. e. Temporary Water and Toilet: See Division 1. C. Equipment Furnished by Owner The Owner will award contracts, which will commence concurrently with this contract. Specifically this work will include: Equipment Installation: Refer to appropriate drawings for equipment furnished by the Owner. 2. Rough -in service pipes to locations as required by architectural and mechanical drawings and equipment shop drawings. Provide service valves on all pipes except waste and vent pipes, plug or cap these. Final connections to equipment will be made by Contractor. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 1.3 PROVISIONS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, and the mechanical drawings and all items hereinafter specified. 1. Prior to any work being performed under this division, examine architectural, structural, food service, civil, electrical, specialty systems, and interior design drawings and specifications. If any discrepancies occur between them and the mechanical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. 2. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the mechanical work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 3. Coordinate the mechanical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of the work. Coordinate mechanical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. 4. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner's agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. 5. In acceptance or rejection of installed mechanical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.4 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES /SITE A. Visit the premises site before submitting bid as no extras will be allowed for lack of knowledge of existing conditions. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conform to applicable sections of NFPA 13 and 24. B. Conform to the National Electrical Code, 2008 Edition. C. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. D. In case of difference between these specifications, codes, laws, industry standards, and /or utility company regulations the most stringent shall govern. E. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS BGCE 15010 -2 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.6 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES A. Apply for and pay for all permits, fees, licenses and inspections for this Division of work. 1. Do not include the cost of any "Plant Investment Fee" or "System Development Charge" for sewer and /or water charged by the City. This will be arranged for and paid for by the Owner. 2. Do not include the cost of any "Gas Application Fee" charged by the Utility Company. This will be arranged and paid for by the Owner. B. Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections required by applicable codes, rules and regulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Furnish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. 1.7 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Temporary heat will be furnished by the General Contractor. Use of the permanent heating system will not be allowed without written authorization from the MECHANICAL ENGINEER. In case the permanent heating system is used for temporary heat, the General Contractor shall pay all costs until acceptance by the Owner. 1.8 EXISTING UTILITIES A. The plans indicate the location, type and sizes of various utilities within the site where known. These utilities are indicated as accurately as possible. If utilities are encountered during construction, which are not shown on the drawings, ask for instructions from the Architect. Any relocation or remodeling required will then be directed by change order. Assume all responsibility for protection of all utilities, shown or not, and repair any damage caused by this construction at no extra charge to the Owner. B. Investigate with proper authorities for all existing water taps, etc. and make arrangements to pay for all removal charges in original bid. C. Owners of all underground utilities shall be notified at least 2 business days prior to excavation so that they can locate and mark underground facilities. 1.9 DRAWINGS A. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and are not to be scaled for dimensions. Take all dimensions from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings, and from the structure itself before fabricating any work. Verify all space requirements, coordinating with other trades, and install the systems in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Conceal all piping in finished areas of the building except where otherwise noted on the drawings. C. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, unless approval is given in writing by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER for deviation. 1.10 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Architect for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Failure to so request clarification of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility. The signing of the Contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. iMi i On II1► A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 1 through 14 and 16 for additional rough - in requirements. 1.12 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit a set of coordination drawings showing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components. Prepare drawings to an accurate scale of % " =1 %0" or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and materials, including clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment. Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. B. Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusively coordinate where space is limited, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessary limited) to the following: MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Ductwork 2. Hydronic Piping 3. Plumbing Piping 4. Fire sprinkler piping 5. Electrical conduit mains 1.13 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components. B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing -in the building. F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible, and in accordance with minimum required clearances as specified in codes and regulations. H. The word "concealed" as used in this specification refers to such spaces as pipe and duct chases, pipe and duct trenches, above plastered ceilings, in walls and buried where pipe and /or duct is inaccessible when building is complete. "Exposed" is intended to be within equipment rooms, unfinished areas, above "push up" ceilings, accessible pipe and duct tunnels. I. The term "furnish" means supply and deliver to Project, unless otherwise defined in greater detail. The term "install" is used to describe operations at Project, from inspecting and unloading, to completion in place, ready for intended use. The term "provide" means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, unless otherwise defined in greater detail. 1.14 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Proposed Product List: Include Products specified in Division 15 specifications. C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, Products, and accessories in a single submittal. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. E. Submit miscellaneous items specified on the drawings, but not covered in the specifications. Make no substitutions without prior approval from the Architect. 1.15 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings on all equipment, Temperature Controls and Fire Protection. Provide shop drawings to the Architect and Engineer showing locations of all access panels. B. Submittals required for this project are as follows: 1. Plumbing fixtures 2. Insulation 3. Boilers 4. Pumps 5. Fan Coil Units 6. Exhaust Fans 7. Fire Protection 8. Piping 9. Snowmelt Tubing, Manifolds and Manifold Boxes 10. Temperature controls 11. Unit and Cabinet Heaters 12. Baseboard 13. Hot Water Storage Tanks 14. Diffusers and Louvers 15. Glycol Feeders 16. Boiler Flue Components and Shop Drawings C. Present shop drawing submittal data at one time, bound in three -ring binders, indexed in a neat and orderly manner. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Provide five sets of submittal data, unless noted otherwise in Division 1. Do not begin work until one (1) copy is returned. D. Provide, with shop drawing submittal, 1/4" scale layout drawings of rooms with boilers, chillers, and HVAC equipment. Layouts shall show locations of, and shall be coordinated with electrical equipment, and equipment shall be drawn to scale. E. Place orders for all equipment in time to prevent any delay in construction schedule or completion of project. If any materials or equipment are not ordered in time, additional charges made by equipment manufacturers to complete their equipment in time to meet construction schedule, together with any special handling charges, shall be borne by the Contractor. F. Contractor agrees that shop drawing submittals processed by the engineer are not change orders. The purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and contract documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or after shop drawings and specifications shall control and shall be followed. G. Contractor to provide manufacturers' recommended installation manuals for equipment. H. Review of shop drawings does not relieve this Contractor from the responsibility of furnishing equipment and materials of proper dimension, size, quantity, quality and all performance characteristics to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the contract documents. Review does not relieve this Contractor from responsibility for errors on the shop drawings. If the shop drawings deviate from the contract documents, advise the MECHANICAL ENGINEER of the deviations in writing accompanying the shop drawings, including the reasons for the deviations. Coordinate all required changes with the other trades affected. If the changes are occasioned by the Contractor, he shall pay any costs involved. 1.16 PROJECT /SITE CONDITIONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of Architect before proceeding. 1.17 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the process of the work, maintain an accurate record of the installation of the mechanical systems. Upon completion of the mechanical systems installation, transfer all record data to blue -line prints of the original drawings. Drawings shall include all addendum items, charge orders, alternations, reroutings, etc. As a condition of acceptance of the project, deliver to the Architect one copy of the record drawings. 1.18 WARRANTY A. All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified. B. Guarantee all workmanship, materials and equipment and replace any found defective without cost to the Owner, for one year after final acceptance, as defined in General Conditions. C. Each warranty for longer than the one year described above (that comes with equipment used on the job) shall be passed on to the owner with dates of start and end of the warranty. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 1.19 ENGINEERING BY CONTRACTOR PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. The construction of this building requires the contractor to design several systems or subsystems. All such design shall be the completed responsibility of the contractor. B. Systems or subsystems which require engineering responsibility by the contractor include, but are not limited to: 1. Fire sprinkler. 2. Equipment supports, not fully detailed in the drawings. 3. Pipe hangers and anchors not specified in these documents, or catalogued by the manufacturer. 4. Temperature controls. 5. Seismic restraints. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER A. Equipment in the following categories shall be of one manufacturer or available through one manufacturer for each category to facilitate ease of maintenance for the Owner. 1. Motors (open drip -proof squirrel cage) 2. Starters 3. Single Suction Pumps 4. Temperature Controls 5. Plumbing Fixture Trim 6. Thermometers 7. Pressure Gauges 8. Gate Valves 9. Butterfly Valves 10. Plug Valves 11. Globe Valves 12. Check Valves 13. Balancing Valves 14. Radiator Valves 15. Traps 16. Dielectric Unions 17. Strainers 18. Air Filters 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS (PRIOR APPROVALS) A. Bidder's Choice Materials, equipment or services listed by several identifying names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed names may be bid without soliciting prior acceptance. Where more than one name is given in the specifications, the MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 first named manufacturer's material, equipment or services is contemplated and any changes and their costs, required to accommodate the other named material or equipment as well as space requirements for the other named materials or equipment, must be assumed by the Contractor in his bid. (See Shop Drawing Requirement). B. Performance Specification 1. When any product is specified only by requirement to meet an industry standard or regulating body standard (such as U.L., AGA, AWWA, ANSI, etc.) and the item proposed carries approval of that body, no prior acceptance by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER is needed. 2. When any product or service is specified by requirement to meet a performance standard or is specified by a generic specification, (no manufacturers name listed) no prior acceptance by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER is needed except as specifically called for in these specifications. C. Acceptance 1. Material and equipment specified is used as a basis of standard, and while not specifically mentioned, material gauges, weights, appearance and space requirements must be met by any substitutions. 2. Action for substitutions specked herein will be given only after the receipt of complete data showing performance over entire range, physical dimensions and material construction all SPECIFICALLY marked for the individual item. Letter of transmittal with at least one (1) copy and one (1) marked up copy of all descriptive data shall be submitted to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER'S Office. 3. Submit shop drawings for all materials and equipment other than the first named in theses specifications showing any changes required in piping, ducting, electrical wiring, space allocation etc. Be responsible to make all changes required to accommodate and to pay for these changes. Coordinate changes required with all other trades. Pay for all changes resulting from re- arranging equipment. 4. See General Conditions for method of notification of acceptance. 2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS (CONTRACTOR AND /OR OWNER INITIATED) A. Materials or equipment listed by several manufacturers' names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed manufacturers may be used in the base bid. Materials or equipment not listed are considered substitutions. B. Performance Specification: When any item is specified by requirement to meet a performance, industry or regulating body standard or is specified by a generic spec, (no manufacturer's name listed) no prior approval by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer is needed unless specifically called for in these specifications. C. Contractor to be responsible for any changes and costs to accommodate any equipment except the first named in the specification. D. Substitutions for Material MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Equipment and materials not listed as equivalents may be proposed as deductive alternates to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item to the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such alternate proposals shall not be substituted for the base bid and must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be deducted for each item and all deviations from specified items. Highlight all difference from specified equipment. If any such alternates are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items within 14 days of award of contract. Late requests for proposed substitutions shall not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concerns. 2.4 BID ALTERNATE(S) A. Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. B. Altemate(s) for Material and Equipment 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid alternates at the time the base bids are due. 2.5 SAFETY PROVISIONS A. Any refrigeration system containing CFC -11, CFC -12, HCFC -123, HCFC -22, or any of the other refrigerants listed in the Clean Air Act as a Class I or Class II Ozone Depleting Compound shall comply with the Clean Air Acts and the Colorado Air Quality Control Commission Regulation #15. B. As a minimum all systems shall be equipped with refrigerant recovery service valves, relief valves capable of resetting after activation, and for system with more than 50 pounds of charge, and isolateable receiver and /or condenser capable of holding the complete charge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STORAGE A. Provide for proper storage of all materials and equipment and assume responsibility for losses due to any cause. All storage shall be within the contact limit lines of the MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-10 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 building site. Cover and store all equipment and materials out of elements; any rusted or weather damaged item shall not be used. 3.2 PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the product manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Consult with manufacturer's technical representatives, who are recognized as technical experts, for specific instructions on special project conditions. If a conflict exists, notify the Architect/Engineer in writing and obtain his instruction before proceeding with the work in question. B. Movement of Equipment 1. Wherever possible, arrange for the movement and positioning of equipment so that enclosing partitions, walls and roofs will not be delayed or need to be removed. 2. Otherwise, advise Contractor of opening requirements to be maintained for the subsequent entry of equipment. C. Heavy Equipment 1. Coordinate the movement of heavy items with shoring and bracing so that the building structure will not be overloaded during the movement and installation. 2. Where mechanical products to be installed on the existing roof are too heavy to be hand - carried, do not transport across the existing roof deck; position by crane or other device so as to avoid overloading the roof deck. D. Clearances Install piping and ductwork: a. Straight and true. b. Aligned with other work. C. Close to walls and overhead structure (allowing for insulation). d. Concealed, where possible, in occupied spaces. e. Out -of- the -way with maximum passageway and headroom remaining in each space. 2. Except as otherwise indicated, arrange mechanical services and overhead equipment with a minimum of: a. 7'0" headroom in storage spaces. b. 8'6" headroom in other spaces. 3. Do not obstruct windows, doors or other openings. 4. Give the right -of way to piping systems required to slope for drainage (over other service lines and ductwork). MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-11 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 5. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping pipes whether or not indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to affect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction. E. Access 1. Install all work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchanger bundles, boiler tubes, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts which might require periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, traps, starters, motors, control components and to clear the openings of doors and of access panels. 3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. B. Close all pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. C. Do not allow any fans in the HVAC system to operate before the area served by the fan has been cleaned and vacuumed of all debris and dust which might enter the system. D. Any equipment, duct or piping systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above "MILL" or "SHOP" conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction. E. Initial fill of traps Provide initial water seal fill for all waste p- traps, condensate traps, or similar traps. 3.4 PROTECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS A. All temporary water connections shall be made with an approved back flow preventer. B. All hose bibbs shall have, as a minimum, a vacuum breaker to prevent back flow. C. Direct connections to hydronic systems shall only be made through a reduced pressure back flow preventer. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-12 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Division 1 sections of the specifications regarding requirements of Record Drawings and Operation and maintenance Manual submittal and systems demonstration. 1. Demonstrate that each system operates properly. 2. Explain the operation of each system to the Owner's Representative. Explain use of O &M manual in operating and maintaining systems. B. Date and time of demonstration will be determined by the Owner. 3.6 ROOF CURBS A. Roof curbs and roof flashings for all equipment located on the roof shall be furnished under the Architectural Division (except for any sound curbs or roof top units' integral curbs specified herein). Furnish and install all counter flashing of the same material as the flashing. 3.7 CONCRETE A. All poured in place concrete shall be furnished under the Architectural Divisions of these Specifications. B. This Contractor shall coordinate all requirements for concrete surrounding buried duct. Ducts shall be tied down to concrete deadman and completely surrounded with 3" of concrete. 3.8 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING FOR MECHANICAL DIVJSION A. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. (MD is Mechanical Division - ED is Electrical Division). APN MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS BGCE 15010-13 VAIL, CO SET IN PLACE OR WIRED AND FURNISHED MOUNTED CONNECTED ITEM UNDER UNDER UNDER 1. Equipment Motors and Thermal MD MD ED overloads, resistance heaters (c). 2. Motor Controllers; magnetic starters, reduced voltage starters MD MD(a) ED and overload relays. 3. Disconnect switches, fused or ED(a) ED(a) ED unfused, H.P. rated switches, APN MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS BGCE 15010-13 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 thermal overload switches and fuses, manual operating switches. 4. Push -button stations, pilot lights, multi -speed switches, float switches, thermostats, control relays, time clocks, control MD MD(b) MD(b) transformers, control panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches and interlocks. 5. Contactors, 120V control circuit outlets for control panels and for ED ED ED boiler controls and for fire protection controls and smoke detectors. 6. Duct Detectors, fire /smoke MD MD ED(c) dampers, elevator vent dampers. a. If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, wiring and connections only by ED. b. If float switches, line thermostats, P.E. switches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, they shall be furnished by the Mechanical Division, but shall be set in place and connected under the Electrical Division, except that where such items are no integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., they shall be set in place under the Mechanical Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechanical Division. Control devices carrying full load current furnished by Mechanical and wired by Electrical shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown on drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. 1) Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by ED; all control function wiring by MD. C. The above list does not attempt to include all components. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. B. 3.9 A. Connections to all controls directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment shall be made with flexible connectors. IDENTIFICATION Piping MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-14 BGCE VAIL, CO P] FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. All exposed piping, except piping in finished spaces, shall be identified in conformance with "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems ", ANSI A13. All markers must be in compliance with respect to (1) proper letter color, (2) proper letter size, (3) correct background color, and (4) proper marker length. 2. Directional flow arrows shall be applied adjacent to each pipe mark. 3. For pipes under 3/4" O.D. color coded (as described above) identification tags shall be securely fastened at all required locations. Tags shall be 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. 4. All piping shall be marked at the following locations: (1) next to each valve and fitting, (2) at each branch and riser take -off, (3) at each wall, ceiling or floor penetration, (4) on pipes that lead to and from underground areas, and (5) every 30 feet on horizontal and vertical pipe runs. Identification of all piping systems shall conform to the designations in the mechanical legend on the drawings. B. Valves 1. All valves shall be identified by color coded (to match piping system identification) tags which indicate both service and number. Tags shall be 1 -1/2 inch in diameter and have 1/4 inch high letters to indicate service and 7/16 inch high numbers. Tags shall be securely fastened to all valves. Service designations shall match abbreviations for piping systems given in mechanical legend on the drawings. Valve charts shall be provided and shall include (1) valve identification number, (2) service, (3) location, and (4) purpose. Valve charts shall be mounted in metal frame with glass enclosure. One valve chart shall be secured on a wall in the boiler room. A second valve chart shall be delivered to the Owner's authorized representative. Also a copy of the valve chart shall be included in the Operations and Maintenance Instructions. C. All fire dampers and their access doors shall be identified by printed stencil secured to the access door or a location approved by the Architect. D. All pneumatic and electric controls, starters, air handling units, pumps, and all other equipment and controls shall be identified by stencil or permanent labeling. E. Care shall be taken not to paint over nameplates. 3.10 PLACING IN OPERATION A. Clean all ducts, pipes, equipment, controls etc., of plaster and other foreign debris. B. Before final acceptance, clean or replace all strainers, oil or grease all bearings and clean out all drains. Clean and recoat all permanent filters, replace throwaway type filters with new filters. C. The systems shall be put into operation. 1. The Contractor shall verify that all controls are set to meet operating conditions specified. a. Example: Boiler operating and limit controls set where specified. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-15 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. The contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment are operable and that all sequences of control are being met. 3. The contractor to adjust settings through 1st year as required by MECHANICAL ENGINEER. 3.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Books of Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be personally delivered to the Owner's authorized representative and the Owner instructed as to their use and the equipment involved. (Provide two books for each building). Also, instruct the Owner's personnel on each valve and the valve chart previously specified. B. The book shall contain, but not be limited to, the following general items: 1. Spare parts lists for each piece of equipment. 2. Operating manuals for each piece of equipment and control. 3. Lubrication charts showing type of lubricant and application methods and frequencies. 4. Filter cleaning or replacement schedule. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 5. Preventive maintenance schedule for checking all items such as belt drive, safety controls and oil and refrigerant charges. Cleaning schedule of all strainers, traps, coils, tubes, tower pans, sprays, etc. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 6. Water treatment recommendations for boiler, tower, etc. 7. Normal operating instructions including a sequence of operation for each system. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 8. Instructions as to procedure to be followed for any emergency situation, such as alarms or safety items being tripped. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 9. Instructions on who to call for service during guarantee period. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 10. Record of equipment installed (copy of each shop drawing as set forth under "Shop Drawing" Paragraph). 11. All warranties provided by Manufacturers on their equipment that run longer than the one year guarantee by the Contractor. C. Books shall be arranged in sequence to match the equipment schedules included in the specifications. D. Approval will not be given for final payment until the tests, balancing and operating instruction portions have been completed. 3.12 EQUIPMENT START -UP A. All boilers, garage ventilation and packaged equipment shall be started by the manufacturer or under the manufacturer's supervision. Start-up data shall be recorded in logs. Copies of start-up logs shall be forwarded to Mechanical Engineer and included in Operation and Maintenance manuals. END OF SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010-16 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 15100 —BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are a part of these specifications. Consult them for further instructions and be governed by the requirements thereunder. 1.2 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All equipment shall have housings suitable for the location installed. C. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of damage and corrosion, unless specifically directed to reuse any existing materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. Furnish ball bearing, squirrel cage, open dripproof, normal starting torque motor of the horsepower and current characteristics specified with thermal overload protection and dustproof and leak proof bearing rings and constructed for use at the altitude where the work is to be located. Motors guaranteed to operate continuously at full load with temperature rise in any part not to exceed NEMA Standards. Motors shall be commercially, dynamically balanced and tested at the factory before shipment and selected for quiet operation. Provide motors for V -belt drives with a cast iron and steel base, with slide rail and adjustable screw device and belt guard. Line up motors and drives and place motors and equipment on foundations ready for operation. B. Motors rated 1 horsepower or greater shall be Department of Energy (DOE) approved "energy efficient', meeting the requirements of EP Act 92, and shall meet NEMA 12 -6C full load efficiencies. Where not commercially available, power factors shall be capacitor corrected by equipment manufacturer to at least 90 percent under rated load conditions. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15100-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 2.2 STARTERS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Provide starters of current and capacity ratings to serve the motor intended. All three phase starters to have over current protection on all three legs. On three phase starters furnish a Phase Monitor Control Relay, Time Mark B258B, or A2586, three - phase monitor control relay to open on phase reversal, phase failure or phase under voltage. Phase monitor control relay shall be mounted and wired in the starter enclosure by this contractor. Furnish switches and green running pilot light in starter cover. If pilot lights are specified on control panel, individual starter lights will not be required. B. Provide integral transformer and 120 -volt control circuit on all starters, which are furnished with control circuits. C. Size thermal overload relays for approximately 115% of full load motor current. Switch and fuse units will not be acceptable unless specifically indicated. 2.3 BELT DRIVES A. Provide belt drives with cast iron sheaves, either companion driven sheaves (except for two groove) or fixed pitch sheaves. If fixed pitch sheaves are used, the MECHANICAL ENGINEER reserves the right to direct speed changes be made, if in his opinion, these are warranted after final balancing. Fixed pitch sheaves shall be bushed type. Provide two groove adjustable drive sheaves with a key for holding pitch adjustment. Use standard FHP, A, B, C and D Sections. FHP belt drives may be used for motors less than three horsepower. Select belt sections for drives for three horsepower and over from the following chart: 0 MOTOR SPEEDS MOTOR SPEEDS HP 1750 1160 HP 1750 1160 A A g.30 C C a. 3 A A h.40 C C b. 5 B B i. 50 B or C C c. 7.5 B B j. 60 C C d. 10 B C k. 100 C D e. 15 C C I. 125 C D f. 25 Provide matched belts sized for 150% of motor schedule horsepower. When A -B sheaves are used, use B Section belts only. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15100-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.4 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide painted, steel access doors with key lock suitable for the surface in which they are installed and satisfactory to the Architect. Recessed style to accept plaster finish, recessed type to accept acoustical tile, flush panel for drywall or flanged flushed panel for remodeling. In installed in fire rated surface, access door to carry proper rating. 2.5 ALTITUDE RATINGS A. Except as otherwise noted, all equipment capacities, air qualities, etc., are adjusted ratings for the elevation of this project as noted on drawings. Manufacturer's ratings shall be adjusted to provide net ratings shown. 2.6 FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL A. General: 1. Products to be used shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 -88 and be listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. B. Bare Piping: 1. Model FD 150 or CP -25. C. Insulated Piping: 1. Model: CP -25 or FS -195, Intumescent. 2. "No -sag" or "self- leveling" as required. D. Plastic Piping: 1. Model: CP -25 or FS -195 Intumescent. 2. "No -Sag" or "Self- leveling" as required. E. Accessories: 1. Provide Fasteners, Restricting collars, backing materials, and protective coatings as required to comply with the UL system listing. F. Manufacturers: 1. 3M or G.E. N1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15100-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FREEZE PROTECTION PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Proximity of any equipment component or fluid piping to potential damage from freezing sources shall be avoided wherever possible. Drawings are diagrammatic. Make location adjustments, add insulation and /or control devices and /or heat sources as necessary to prevent or minimize freeze damage potential. The Architect/Engineer will neither guarantee nor be responsible for any consequences of freezing. A. Equipment 1. Erect all floor mounted equipment on 4" high concrete pads over the complete floor area of the equipment. 2. Where inertia bases are indicated, pour these bases within structural channel frames having mountings attached to the inside perimeter and furnished with supplementary spring units. Furnish bases with an 18 gauge sheet metal bottom welded in place to retain the concrete. Anchor bolts and reinforcing bars are to be set in the field, #5 reinforcing bars top and bottom, 12" o.c. both ways. Provide one #5 bar at comers, top and bottom, 2'x 2' long. The mounting housing shall have concrete anchors and form enclosures for the spring elements. No damping material shall be used between the inner and outer housing on mountings and mountings shall have a combination lifting and leveling adjustment and 1/4" thick neoprene acoustical friction pads bonded to the steel base. 3. Mount supply and return centrifugal fans, cabinet fans and air handling units (where called for on plans) on inertia base with a weight equal to not less than 1- 1/2 times the combined weight of the fan and motor. Where centrifugal fan is used, mount fan and motor on common steel base. 4. Support each air or refrigeration compressor, (including temperature control compressor) base mounted pump, factory assembled air handing unit and fan by Mason Industries or equivalent spring type vibration isolators, as follows: 5. All mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. 6. Equipment with operating weight different than the installed weight, such as chillers and cooling towers and equipment exposed to wind, such as roof fans, cooling towers, etc., shall be mounted on spring mountings as directed in Mason BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15100-4 BGCE VAIL, CO GROUND SUPPORTED 20' FLOOR SPAN SLAB OR BASEMENT POSSIBLE FLOOR EQUIPMENT MASON DEFL 0.67" MASON Min Static Engr. Min Static En r. Spec Defl. in. Sec. Defl. in. a. Blowers 1 Centrifugal Blowers A -J .035 B -J 5. All mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. 6. Equipment with operating weight different than the installed weight, such as chillers and cooling towers and equipment exposed to wind, such as roof fans, cooling towers, etc., shall be mounted on spring mountings as directed in Mason BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15100-4 BGCE VAIL, CO 0 FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Engineering Spec. B, but a housing shall be provided that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. Limit stops shall be out of contract during normal operation. -• . Domestic Hot and Cold Water, Heating Water and Waste Piping a. Domestic hot and cold water piping one inch diameter and smaller shall be isolated with the Acousto -Plumb System of orange and blue pipe isolators, holders, and guide, as manufactured by LSP /Specialty Products Company, Tel (800) 854 -3215. b. Isolate waste piping and domestic hot and cold water piping larger than one inch in diameter with Trisolator system of pipe isolators as manufactured by Elmdor /Stoneman, Tel. (818) 968 -8699. C. Do not allow the piping, pipe connectors, pipe hangers or valve to directly touch the structure, studs, gypsum board, or other pipes. d. Copper waste piping must be completely wrapped with Lowry's acoustical pipe wrap. The wrap is manufactured by Harry A. Lowry, Tel. (818) 768- 4661. C. Flexible Connections 1. Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. 3.3 CONTROL VALVE PIPING A. If the control valve size is smaller than the pipe size marked on the drawing, the reduction in size pertains to the valve only. Gate valves, globe valves, and strainers on either side of the automatic valve shall be a minimum of the pipe size marked on the drawings. 3.4 PUMP CONNECTIONS A. Where the suction or discharge of any pump unit is smaller than the pipe size noted on the drawings, all strainers, valves, flexible connections, expansion joints, etc., shall be a minimum of the pipe size noted on the drawings. 3.5 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish an access door for each pipe chase for each floor. This includes both toilet plumbing chases and pipe riser chases. Access doors assembly to be minimum size of 16" x 16 ". BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS BGCE 15100-5 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Also, furnish access doors in all non - removable ceilings and in partitions and walls where necessary to maintain access to plumbing cleanouts, shock absorbers, fire dampers, manual dampers, valves and other mechanical devices requiring access. Size these as required for access. C. Provide all access doors to the General Contractor for him to construct into the building. D. Submit shop drawing indicating the locations of all access doors. 3.6 WELDING A. Provide all welding in accordance with the welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or other approved procedure conforming to the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. Only welders who have been fully qualified under the specified procedure shall be employed. 3.7 PIPE DEPTHS A. Interior pipe below slabs shall be a minimum of 4 inches below slab and shall not be in contact with concrete at any point. Minimum exterior cover over water piping, unless otherwise shown or required by code, shall be 8 feet above the top of the pipe. Area drains shall have maximum cover possible consistent with finished landscape and acceptable flow lines. Gas piping shall have minimum of 3 foot cover with warning tape 12" above pipe. Sanitary waste and storm drain lines shall have 3 foot cover minimum. 3.8 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Full- length pipe in longest lengths possible shall be used. All threads shall be right hand, pipe standard, clean cut, full depth and tapering. Install piping so as to permit complete draining. Provide drains at all low points. All interior soil, waste and condensate lines shall have uniform pitch in the direction of flow of not less than 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise noted. Ream out all pipe ends, turn on ends and rattle before installing. 3.9 DUCTS A. Construct straight and smooth with neatly finished joints, airtight and free from vibration. Internal ends of slip joints shall be made in the direction of flow. Changes in duct dimensions and shape shall be gradual and uniform. Curved elbows, unless otherwise noted, to have centerline radius of at least 1 -1/2 times the duct width. Air turns shall be installed in all abrupt elbows and shall be arranged to permit air to make turns without appreciable turbulence and to remain quiet when the system is in operation. Construction of ducts shall be per the details and recommendations of the latest edition of the ASHRAE handbook and U.M.C. The most stringent requirement governs in conflicts. "Duct mate" joint method may be utilized provided all portions of seam /joint materials are provided by "duct mate" and installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's standards. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15100-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.10 FIRE DAMPERS AND FIRE /SMOKE DAMPERS A. Install as required by NFPA pamphlet No. 90A, the Uniform Building Code, Uniform Mechanical Code and as required by local codes. Provide a duct access door to each fire damper and service access when architecture is restrictive. Furnish UL 555S labeled fire and fire /smoke dampers. Refer to architectural drawings for fire resistive ratings of walls, floors, ceilings, etc. 3.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. 3.12 EXPANSION COMPENSATION AND SEISMIC PROTECTION A. Examine piping layout and provide anchors or expansion joints required to adequately protect system. B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. C. Accomplish structural work and provide equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping, loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, and provide corrugated bellows type expansion joints where required. D. Provide seismic bracing as required by code for all ducts, piping and equipment. 3.13 SLEEVES, CUTTING, PATCHING A. Major openings in the structure for mechanical work may be shown on the structural drawings; these will be done under the Architectural Division of these Specifications. It is the Contractor's responsibility to set necessary sleeves and boxes for pipe and ducts (not shown on the structural drawings) before erection of structure. This Contractor is responsible for the correct size and location of all openings including coordination with the other trades. All sleeves shall be large enough to allow for continuous insulation to pass through the sleeve. B. In mechanical equipment room floors, all pipe sleeves to the Schedule 40 pipe and shall extend 1" above finished floor. In mechanical equipment room floors, all ducts shall have a 4" high concrete curb around duct. C. Caulk all pipes and ducts leaving equipment rooms between sleeve and duct or pipe, 1" deep on each side of wall, floor, or roof. Caulk bare pipes and ducts with lead wool. Caulk insulated pipes with 1- or 2 -part polysulphide caulking compound. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15100-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. In the same manner as described in Paragraph C above, caulk all other pipes and ducts throughout the building which penetrate walls and floors and roofs this includes pipe and ducts to rooftop units. E. All pipes which may be in view shall be finished with chrome floor, wall and ceiling plates, except in equipment rooms. 3.14 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation, trenching, bedding of pipe, placement and cover, backfilling, etc., in conjunction with work under this Division, shall be per requirements of Division 2 and the additional requirements specified herein. B. Trenches: Slope bottoms uniformly to drain. Trench bottoms to be firm, free from large rocks or boulders, or shall have concrete cradles placed to support piping. Cradles to bear on undisturbed soil. C. Cast iron: Place on firm trench bottom shaped to accept hubs. Both hubs and pipe shall have uniform firm bearing. Place a minimum of 12 inches of loose rock -free material over pipe. D. Other piping, conduits, culverts: Place on firm trench bottom and backfill per Division 2 and 15 or embed per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Expansion: Place pipe fittings and thrust blocks per manufacturer's recommendations and /or project specifications. F. Excavation: Provide all excavating and backfilling required by the work in this division, all as required by the rules of the State Department of Labor and Equipment. All pipe must be laid on solid earth with bellholes provided for hubs. After pipe is laid in trench, it shall be tested, insulated if specified, and backfilled. G. Compaction 1. Backfill by hand around the pipe and the first 12" over the top of the pipe. Moisten, backfill, and tamp in 8" layers (maximum) with air motor or gasoline driven tamper to consolidate to 90% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content. (Puddling will not be allowed). 2. Trenches under road surfacing shall have the upper 6" layer, forming the subgrade for pavement compacted to at least 95% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content for rigid pavements. 3. Density of backfill shall be determined by the requirements of the A.A.S.H.O. in Pamphlet 57. Standard Method T- 99 -57. 4. Where requirements of the general conditions are more stringent than the above, the general condition requirements shall be met. H. Pavement Accomplish cutting of flexible pavement so that the remaining exposed edge of the pavement conforms vertically and horizontally to a straight line. The width of the section of pavement removed shall be of necessary width for the proper BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15100-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 laying of pipe, but shall not exceed 36 ". Waste material resulting from the above operations will be disposed of in suitable waste areas. Repair pavement to satisfaction of the authorities having jurisdiction. Shoring Provide all shoring required to perform the excavation and to protect the project, employees, and public. J. Surveying Establish all lines, grades and elevations. Stake out the work and furnish all lines, stakes (1" x 2" x 10 "), and all hubs or hardwood pegs (1" x 1" x 6 ") to stake out the lines and structures to line and grade. K. Maintaining and Protecting Traffic Maintain sufficient barricades, warning signals and lights to protect pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Provide and maintain such detours as may be necessary to keep traffic moving during construction. Surface Drainage and Ground Water 1. Surface drainage shall be diverted away from open excavation and trenching before commencement of work at the location. Surface water on ground water seepage, which enters or accumulates in the trenches, shall be removed by pumping or subdraining, and the subgrade or pipe bed restored to original bearing value and conditions. M. Any settling of backfilled trenches which may occur during the warranty period shall be repaired without expense to the Owner, including the complete restoration of all damaged property. 3.15 FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS A. Furnish and install as indicated on the plans and /or as may be necessary for the proper installation of all equipment furnished under this Division, all foundations, bases and supports. Contractor shall be responsible for their correct location and sizes to fit all equipment. Shim and grout between the equipment and its base to align and level. Bolt equipment inertia bases, vibration isolators, and supports to prevent relative movement. B. Furnish all hangers, anchors, sway bracing, guides, etc., for the various piping and duct systems as required for their proper installation. 3.16 FIRE STOPPING A. Install firestopping materials in accordance with their UL and ASTM tested methods. B. Coordinate required annular space with size of pipe and sleeve. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15100-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO C. Requirements for specific systems: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Cold piping: Includes chilled water, domestic water, storm water and refrigerant: Insulation and vapor barrier shall be continued through wall and firestopping for "insulated piping" shall be provided. 2. Hot piping to 250 °F includes domestic hot water, steam to 15 psig and heating hot water: The Contractor has the option of continuing the insulation through the penetration and providing firestopping for "insulated piping ", or stopping the insulation on either side of the penetration and using firestopping for uninsulated piping 3. High temperature piping, over 250 °F or over 15 psig steam: Contractor shall stop insulation and provide firestopping for "high temperature piping ". END OF SECTION 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15100-10 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. a 1.2 A. B. C. D. E. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 SUMMARY This Section includes mechanical insulation for boiler breeching, duct, equipment, and pipe, including the following: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Calcium silicate. b. Cellular glass. C. Flexible elastomeric. d. Mineral fiber. e. Polyisocya nu rate. 2. Fire -rated insulation systems. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Lagging adhesives. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory- applied jackets. 8. Field- applied jackets. 9. Tapes. 10. Securements. 11. Corner angles. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section "Hydronic Distribution" for loose -fill pipe insulation in underground piping outside the building. 2. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners. DEFINITIONS ASJ: All- service jacket. FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper. FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride. SSL: Self- sealing lap. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 1.3 SUBMITTALS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), and flame spread and smoke developed indices. B. Shop Drawings: Show details for the following: 1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Application of field - applied jackets. 7. Application at linkages of control devices. 8. Field application for each equipment type. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire - test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame- spread index of 25 or less, and smoke - developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame- spread index of 75 or less, and smoke - developed index of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field- applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Calcium Silicate: 1. Products: MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 a. Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo -12 Gold. 2. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat -, curved -, and grooved -block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non - asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. 3. Flat -, curved -, and grooved -block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non - asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. 4. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. Products: a. Cell -U -Foam Corporation; Ultra -CUF. b. Pittsburgh Coming Corporation; Foamglas Super K. 2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special- Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type Ill. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory- Applied ASJ -SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded - rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. Products: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. C. RBX Corporation; Insul -Sheet 1800 and Insul -Tube 180. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. C. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All- Service Duct Wrap. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 J. Mineral Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory- applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation without factory- applied jacket. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; ..FBX. C. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin -Glas. d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. K. High- Temperature, Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory- applied jacket. Products: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. b. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin -Glas. C. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations. d. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board. e. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW. f. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt. L. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: Products: •a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville;•Micro -Lok. C. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley -K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory- applied ASJ -SSL. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. M. Mineral- Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory- applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k- value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in. /h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. C. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. N. Polyisocya nu rate: Unfaced, preformed, rigid cellular polyisocyanurate material intended for use as thermal insulation. Products: a. Apache Products Company; ISO -25. b. Dow Chemical Company (The); Trymer. C. Duna USA Inc.; Corafoam. d. Elliott Company; Elfoam. 2. Comply with ASTM C 591, Type I or Type IV, except thermal conductivity (k- value) shall not exceed 0.19 Btu x in. /h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F after 180 days of aging. 3. Flame- spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke - developed index shall be 50 or less for thickness up to 1 -1/2 inches as tested by ASTM E 84. 4. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 5. Factory- Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. a. Pipe Applications: PVDC -SSL. b. Equipment Applications: PVDC -SSL. 2.3 FIRE -RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS A. Fire -Rated Board: Structural- grade, press - molded, xonolite calcium silicate,. fireproofing board suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F. Comply with ASTM C 656, Type II, Grade 6. UL tested and certified to provide a2 -hour fire rating. 1. Products: a. Johns Manville; Super Firetemp M. B. Fire -Rated Blanket: High - temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is UL tested and certified to provide a 2 -hour fire rating. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; FlameChek. b. Johns Manville; Firetemp Wrap. C. Nelson Firestop Products; Nelson FSB Flameshield Blanket. d. Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap. e. 3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products. f. Unifrax Corporation; FyreWrap. g. Vesuvius; PYROSCAT FP FASTR Duct Wrap. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.4 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium - silicate -based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -97. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81- 27/81 -93. C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 290. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 760. C. Cellular -Glass and Polyisocyanurate Adhesive: Solvent -based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81 -33. D. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 24179A, Type 11, Class I. 1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. C. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. E. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2, Grade A. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -20. C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S- 90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. F. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22- 25.ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -20. C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S- 90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25. G. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns - Manville; Zeston Perma -Weld, CEEL -TITE Adhesive. C. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear. e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive. 2.5 MASTICS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Solvent Welding A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL- C- 19565C, Type II. B. Vapor- Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -90. C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 -mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. C. Vapor- Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -30. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -35. G. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -25. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 501. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -10. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35 -mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 5. Color: White. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 D. Vapor- Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 60- 95/60 -96. C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 570. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -70. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30 -mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -10. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35 -00. C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB- 05/15. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -50. f. Vimasco Corporation; WC -1 /WC -5. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625 -inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.6 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Description: Comply with MIL- A -3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81 -42. C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 11 -30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 136. 2. Fire- resistant, water -based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire- resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.7 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Joint Sealants for Cellular - Glass, Phenolic -Foam, and Polyisocyanu rate Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -45. C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44 -05. e. Pittsburgh Coming Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 5. Color: White or gray. B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76 -8. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95 -44. C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44 -05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water- resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water- resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-10 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.8 FACTORY - APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory- applied jackets on various applications. When factory- applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft- paper, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ -SSL: ASJ with self - sealing, pressure- sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type 1. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4 -mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame- spread index of 5 and a smoke - developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 6. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6 -mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame - spread index of 5 and a smoke - developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 7. PVDC -SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self - sealing, pressure- sensitive, acrylic - based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a. Products: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 8. Vinyl Jacket: UL -rated white vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 2.9 FIELD - APPLIED JACKETS A. Field- applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum - foil -face, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing. C. PVC Jacket: High- impact- resistant, UV- resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354 -C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field- applied jacket schedules. Products: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. C. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-11 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory- fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90- degree, short- and long- radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil -pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P -trap and supply covers for lavatories. 5. Factory- fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. D. Metal Jacket: 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. C. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul -Mate. 2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H -14. a. Factory cut and rolled to size. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field - applied jacket schedules. C. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1 -mil- thick, heat - bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3 -mil- thick, heat - bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. e. Factory- Fabricated Fitting Covers: 1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2 -piece or gore, 45- and 90- degree, short- and long- radius elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory- fabricated fitting covers are not available. E. Underground Direct - Buried Jacket: 125 -mil thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven -glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil. 1. Products: a. Pittsburgh Coming Corporation; Pittwrap. b. Polyguard; Insulrap No Torch 125. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-12 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 F. Self- Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60 -mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum -foil facing. Products: a. Polyguard; Alumaguard 60. G. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4 -mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame- spread index of 5 and a smoke - developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. Products: Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film. H. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6 -mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame- spread index of 5 and a smoke - developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. PVDC -SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self - sealing, pressure- sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. 2.10 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor- retarder tape matching factory- applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus /SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force /inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf /inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor- retarder tape matching factory- applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-13 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 1. Products: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW /SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force /inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf /inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor- retarder tape matching field - applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force /inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 Ibf /inch in width. D. Aluminum -Foil Tape: Vapor- retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force /inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 Ibf /inch in width. E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor- retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-14 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Film Thickness: 4 mils. 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 Ibf /inch in width. F. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor- retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Film Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 Ibf /inch in width. X0111:1:111•I :4ZI11 •*] A. Bands: 1. Products: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. C. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor- Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc- coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor- discharge welding, 0.106- inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP -1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS. 2. Cupped -Head, Capacitor- Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc - coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor- discharge welding, 0.106 -inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1 -1/2 -inch galvanized carbon -steel washer. a. Products: MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-15 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP -1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHIP. 3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self - locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul- Hangers, Series T. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. C. Spindle: Copper- or zinc - coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 - inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self - locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: Products: 1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers. b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. C. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106 -inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2 -1/2 inches. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 5. Self- Sticking -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self - locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul- Hangers, Series TSA. 2) GEMCO; Press and Peel. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-16 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. C. Spindle: Copper- or zinc - coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 - inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive- backed base with a peel -off protective cover. 6. Insulation- Retaining Washers: Self- locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch- thick, galvanized -steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC -150. 2) GEMCO; R -150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA -150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. b. Protect ends with capped self - locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 7. Nonmetal Insulation- Retaining Washers: Self- locking washers formed from 0.016- inch -thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. a. Manufacturers: 1) GEMCO. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. C. Staples: Outward- clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4- inch -wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.062 -inch soft - annealed, stainless steel. 1. Manufacturers: a. ACS Industries, Inc. b. C & F Wire. C. Childers Products. d. PABCO Metals Corporation. e. RPR Products, Inc. 2.12 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Comer Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354 -C. White or color -coded to match adjacent surface. B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H -14. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-17 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Stainless -Steel Comer Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240, Type 304 or 316. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. 2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that applies to insulation. 3.2 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-18 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor- barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor- barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory- applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3- inch -wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 -1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self - sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o:c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor- barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor- barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-19 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration - control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.3 PENETRATIONS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1 Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Below -Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. Firestopping and fire - resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-20 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire -rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.4 A. DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION INSTALLATION Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor- discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor- discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. 3.5 F-13 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces. 2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints. 3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self- sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME - labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that is compatible temperature and with substrate. C. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor -pin spacing is 3 insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. MECHANICAL INSULATION BGCE with service inches from 15080-21 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless -steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials. 6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands. 7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. B. Insulation Installation on Pumps: 1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6 -inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8- inch- diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism. 2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least .040 inch thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier. 3.6 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-22 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor- retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor - barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric - reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well- shaped contour. For services not specified to receive a field- applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. Label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers as necessary. Installation shall conform to the following: MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-23 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless -steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two -part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless -steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field- applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.7 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Boiler Breechings and Ducts: 1. Secure single -layer insulation with stainless -steel bands at 12 -inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation material. 2. Install 2 -layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12 -inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless -steel bands at 12 -inch intervals. 3. On exposed applications without metal jacket, finish insulation surface with a skim coat of mineral - fiber, hydraulic- setting cement. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish. B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure single -layer insulation with stainless -steel bands at 12 -inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Install 2 -layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12 -inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless -steel bands at 12 -inch intervals. 3. Apply a skim coat of mineral - fiber, hydraulic- setting cement to insulation surface. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-24 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation. D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation. E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 2. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3. Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation. 3.8 A. CELLULAR -GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: bands and tighten bands seams, end joints, and ambient services, secure 4. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor- barrier mastic and flashing sealant. 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudina protrusions with vapor- barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on above laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular - glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-25 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular -glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular -glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.9 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-26 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.10 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor- barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor - barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-27 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor- discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor- discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward - clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field - applied jacket, adhesive, vapor- barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor - barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor - barrier mastic applied in a Z- shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches O.C. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6- inch -wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-28 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor- discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor- discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward- clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor- barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier sea[ b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor- barrier mastic applied in a Z- shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6- inch -wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.11 POLYISOCYAN U RATE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-29 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with tape or bands and tighten without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe. 2. For insulation with factory- applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor- barrier mastic. 3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor- barrier system. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1 -1/2 -inch thickness. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyisocyanurate block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. C. Insulation Installation on Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of polyisocyanurate insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.12 POLYSTYRENE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe. 2. For insulation with factory- applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor- barrier mastic. 3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor - barrier system. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. MECHANICAL INSULATION BGCE 15080-30 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1 -1/2 -inch thickness. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polystyrene block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.13 FIELD - APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where glass -cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory- applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2 -inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062- inch -thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1 -1/2 -inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3- inch -wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor- retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor- barrier mastic. C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1 -inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2 -inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless -steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows: MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-31 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. 2. Wrap factory- presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1 -1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint. 3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond. 4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33 -1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2 -inch- circumference limit allows for 2- inch - overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. 5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1 -1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges. 3.14 FIRE -RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Where fire -rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous UL- listed fire rating. B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct. C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire -rated assemblies. Fire -stop systems are specified in Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.15 FINISHES A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass - Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex- emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless -steel jackets. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-32 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.16 BOILER BREECHING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Provide as a pricing alternate. Breeching and connector insulation shall be the following: 1. Calcium Silicate: 4 inches thick. 3.17 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Supply, return and outdoor air. Reference Section 15815, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and return air ductwork. B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Fibrous -glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE /IESNA 90.1 do not require an additional duct wrap. 3. Factory- insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory- insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration - control devices. 7. Factory- insulated access panels and doors. 3.18 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Concealed, rectangular, round and flat -oval, supply air, return air and outdoor -air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Duct Liner: Reference Section 15815, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and return air ductwork B. Concealed, rectangular, round and flat -oval exhaust -air duct insulation between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior shall be one of the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. C. Exposed, rectangular, round and flat -oval, supply air, return air, exhaust air and outdoor -air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Duct Liner: Reference Section 15815, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and return air ductwork 3.19 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-33 5080 33 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Ductwork located in attic considered to be outdoor duct. C. Concealed or exposed rectangular, round and flat -oval, supply air, return air, exhaust air and outdoor -air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 2. Mineral -Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 3. Duct Liner: Reference Section 15815, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and return air ductwork 3.20 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated. C. Heating- hot -water expansion /compression tank insulation shall be the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. D. Heating- hot -water air - separator insulation shall be the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick. E. Domestic hot -water storage tank insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Pipe and Tank: 4 inches thick. 3.21 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Fire - suppression piping. 2. Below -grade piping. 3. Chrome - plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.22 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-34 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick. 2. NPS 1 -1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: 1. NPS 1 -1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick. 2. NPS 1 -1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. C. Stormwater and Overflow, including that routed from the high roof, second level roof and second level deck: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. A. Roof Drain and. Overflow Drain Bodies, including that routed from the high roof, second level roof and second level deck: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick. B. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick. C. Heating- Hot -Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below: 1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 inch thick. 3.23 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Water Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. MECHANICAL INSULATION BGCE 15080-35 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. C. Heating- Hot -Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Po lyisocya nu rate: 2 inches thick. D. Engine Exhaust Piping and Silencer, All Pipe Sizes: Calcium silicate, 4 inches thick. 3.24 OUTDOOR, UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Factory installed, high density foam. 3.25 INDOOR, FIELD - APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory- applied jacket, install the field - applied jacket over the factory- applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: 1. PVC: 20 mils thick. D. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Smooth with 1 -1/4 -Inch Deep Corrugations: 0.032 inch thick. E. Piping, Concealed: 1. None. 2. PVC: 20 mils thick. F. Piping, Exposed: 1. PVC: 20 mils thick. 3.26 OUTDOOR, FIELD - APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory- applied jacket, install the field- applied jacket over the factory- applied jacket. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-36 vi BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.016 inch thick. D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with 1 -1/4 -Inch Deep Corrugations 0.032 inch thick. E. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with Z- Shaped Locking Seam: 0.016 inch thick. F. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with 1 -1/4- Inch -Deep Corrugations: 0.032 inch thick. G. Piping, Exposed: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with Z- Shaped Locking Seam: 0.016 inch thick. 3.27 UNDERGROUND, FIELD - INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET A. Waterproof, continuous jacket for underground direct -buried piping applications. END OF SECTION 15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-37 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Under- building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building. 2. Flexible connectors. B. Related Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water - service piping and water meters outside the building from source to the point where water - service piping enters the building. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality - control reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type Lwater tube, drawn temper. 1. Cast - Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME 816.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought- Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought- copper pressure DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder -joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast - copper - alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball- and - socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder -joint or threaded ends. 5. Copper Pressure -Seal -Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. 2) NIBCO INC. 3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. b. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought - copper fitting with EPDM- rubber O -ring seal in each end. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Cast - bronze or wrought - copper fitting with EPDM - rubber O -ring seal in each end. 6. Copper Push -on -Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) NVent LLC. b. Description: Cast - copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or wrought - copper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22; with stainless -steel teeth and EPDM- rubber O -ring seal in each end instead of solder -joint ends. 2.3 PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS A. PEX Distribution System: ASTM F 877, SDR 9 tubing. 1. Fittings for PEX Tube: ASTM F 1807, metal -insert type with copper or stainless - steel crimp rings and matching PEX tube dimensions. 2. Manifold: Multiple - outlet, plastic or corrosion- resistant -metal assembly complying with ASTM F 877; with plastic or corrosion - resistant -metal valve for each outlet. 2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full -face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe - Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water - flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys for general -duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. E. Plastic, Pipe - Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. Fitting -Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. B. Sleeve -Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219. 2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Description: a. Pressure Rating: 150 psigat 180 deg F. b. End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Description: a. Factory- fabricated, bolted, companion -flange assembly. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. C. End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric - Flange Kits: 1. Description: a. . Non - conducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. C. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. E. Dielectric Nipples: DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO Description: a. Electroplated steel nipple. b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. C. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. 2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Bronze -Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated- bronze tubing with bronze wire -braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing. 1. Working- Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain -end copper tube. 3. End Connections NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy. B. Stainless -Steel -Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated- stainless -steel tubing with stainless -steel wire -braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing. 1. Working- Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel -pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install shutoff valve, hose -end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers. D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 E. Install water - pressure- reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure - reducing valves. F. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb. G. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. H. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. K. Install piping to permit valve servicing. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. M. Install piping free of sags and bends. N. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. O. Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees. P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. Q. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. R. Install thermostats in hot -water circulation piping. S. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. C. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." E. Pressure - Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure -seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. F. Copper- Tubing, Push -on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push -on -joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos -free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. H. PEX Piping Joints: Join according to ASTM F 1807. Dissimilar - Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General -Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations. B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." Hose -End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. Stop- and -Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose -end drain valves where indicated. D. Install balancing valve in each hot -water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves. 3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping. B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping: 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and Smaller: Fitting -type coupling. 2. NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve -type coupling. C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic -to -metal transition fittings or unions. 3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flange kits nipples. 3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water pump. B. Install bronze -hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing. C. Install stainless - steel -hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping. 3.8 WATER METER INSTALLATION A. Rough -in domestic water piping for water meter installation according to utility company's requirements. B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company. 3.9 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation. 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. 3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. P1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1 -1/4: 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 2 -1/2: 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. F. Install vinyl- coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. G. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches. H. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.10 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water - service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect domestic water piping to water - service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold -water inlet and hot -water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot -water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 15 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes. 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot -water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.11 IDENTIFICATION PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation. B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Piping Inspections: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for re- inspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Piping Tests: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.13 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable and non - potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water /chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water /chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. C. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.14 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder -joint fittings; and brazed soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure - seal -joint fittings; and pressure - sealed joints. 3. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper push -on -joint fittings; and push -on joints. 4. , PEX Tube, NPS 1 and smaller; fittings for PEX tube; and crimped joints. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-10 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, pressure - sealed joints. Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder -joint Type L; copper pressure - seal -joint fittings; and 3.15 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3. Hot -Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose -end drain valves. END OF SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-11 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 15145 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties: 1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure- reducing valves. 4. Balancing valves. 5. Strainers. 6. Hose bibbs. 7. Wall hydrants. 8. Drain valves. 9. Water hammer arresters. 10. Trap -seal primer valves. B. See Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components. 2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES BGCE 15145-1 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 A. Pipe - Applied, Atmospheric -Type Vacuum Breakers: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ames Co. b. Cash Acme. C. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. e. Rain Bird Corporation. f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3as required to match connected piping. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Rough bronze. B. Hose- Connection Vacuum Breakers : Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. b. Cash Acme. C. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Legend Valve. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Prier Products, Inc. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Woodford Manufacturing Company. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Body: Bronze, non - removable, with manual drain. 4. Outlet Connection: Garden -hose threaded complying with ASME 81.20.7. 5. Finish: Rough bronze. 2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Intermediate Atmospheric -Vent Backflow Preventers : 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 15145-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO a. Cash Acme. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. C. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Honeywell Water Controls. e. Legend Valve. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1012. 3. Operation: Continuous - pressure applications. 4. Size: NPS 1/2. 5. Body: Bronze. 6. End Connections: Union, solder joint. 7. Finish: Rough bronze. B. Double -Check Backflow- Prevention Assemblies: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. C. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1015. 3. Operation: Continuous - pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psigmaximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 6. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 7. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate -type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 2.3 WATER PRESSURE - REDUCING VALVES A. Water Regulators : Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cash Acme. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 15145-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Honeywell Water Controls. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1003. 3. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig. 4. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass. 5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and NPS 3. 2.4 BALANCING VALVES A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red -White Valve Corp. 2. Standard: MSS SP -110 for two - piece, copper -alloy ball valves. 3. Pressure Rating: 400 -psig minimum CWP. 4. Size: NPS 2 or smaller. 5. Body: Copper alloy. 6. Port: Standard or full port. 7. Ball: Chrome - plated brass. 8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 10. Handle: Vinyl- covered steel with memory- setting device. 2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Y- Pattern Strainers : 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or FDA - approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size: DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 15145-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch. b. Strainers NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch C. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.10 inch. 6. Drain: Pipe plug. 2.6 HOSE BIBBS A. Hose Bibbs : 1. Standard: ASME All 12.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder -joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden -hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral non - removable, drainable, hose - connection vacuum breaker complying with ASS 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze. 10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle. 13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Wheel handle. 14. Include operating key with each operating -key hose bibb. 15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel - plated hose bibb. 2.7 WALL HYDRANTS A. - Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. b. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC. C. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay. R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Woodford Manufacturing Company. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. 2. Standard: ASSE 1019, Type A or Type B. 3. Type: Freeze - resistant, automatic draining with integral air -inlet valve. 4. Classification: Type B, for automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and nozzle closed. 5. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 15145-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 6. Operation: Wheel handle. 7. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp. 8. Inlet: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4. 9. Outlet: Exposed with garden -hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 2.8 DRAIN VALVES A. Ball -Valve -Type, Hose -End Drain Valves: 1. Standard: MSS SP -110 for standard -port, two -piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400 - psigminimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome - plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl- covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden -hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. 2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. C. MIFAB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI -WH 201. 3. Type: Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI -WH 201, Sizes A through F. 2.10 TRAP -SEAL PRIMER VALVES A. Supply -Type, Trap -Seal Primer Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 15145-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. MIFAB, Inc. b. PPP Inc. C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1018. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint. 6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint. 7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric -vent drain connection with air -gap fitting, fixed air -gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air -gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory- stop balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. E. Install Y- pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure- reducing valve, and solenoid valve,. F. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI -WH 201. G. Install supply -type, trap -seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor -drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 15145-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 H. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic - laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Intermediate atmospheric -vent backflow preventers. 2. Double -check backflow - prevention assemblies. 3. Water pressure- reducing valves. 4. Supply -type, trap -seal primer valves. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports: Test each double -check backflow - prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Set field- adjustable pressure set points of water pressure- reducing valves. B. Set field - adjustable flow of balancing valves. END OF SECTION 15145 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 15145-8 BGCE VAIL, CO P] P7 P] FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. B. Related Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewerage" for sanitary sewerage piping and structures outside the building. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality - control reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF /ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF -dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF- sewer" for plastic sewer piping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 HUB - AND - SPIGOT, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.3 HUBLESS, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. CISPI, Hubless- Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ANACO- Husky. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. C. Fernco Inc. d. Matco - Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless -steel corrugated shield with stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 2.5 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Fitting -Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Fernco Inc. 3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. C. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. C. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full - length, corrosion - resistant outer shield and corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long -turn, double Y- branch and 1/8 -bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change. direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system.. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. K. Install cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." L. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. M. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. N. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in sanitary waste gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 Piping Specialties." 3. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. B. Join hubless, cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless- piping coupling joints. C. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. D. Plastic, Nonpressure- Piping, Solvent- Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe - handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes. K��;1XyL1>�r'1;11,a;yltagore i<>;� un»_ag[�P► A. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Unshielded Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated. 2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves unless drain has integral backwater valve. 3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 4. Comply with requirements for backwater valve specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for seismic - restraint devices specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Install carbon -steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install stainless -steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments. 3. Install carbon -steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 4. Install stainless -steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments. 5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 6. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs: 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. C. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling. D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods. F. Install hangers for cast -iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3 /4- inchrod. 5. Spacing for 10 -foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. G. Install supports for vertical cast -iron soil piping every 15 feet. H. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4 -inch rod. I. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches. J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 5. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor. 6. Comply with requirements for backwater valves cleanouts drains specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 7. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING BGCE 15150-7 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NIPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing -in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 -foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 watertight. Plug vent -stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1 -inch wg. Use U -tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water -based latex paint. 3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless- piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe - Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless- piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe - Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless- piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 4. Dissimilar Pipe - Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. E. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless- piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe - Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. F. Underground, soil and waste piping NIPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless- piping couplings; coupled joints. 3. Solid -wall PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe - Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. END OF SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-10 BGCE VAIL, CO SECTION 15155 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Backwater valves. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Floor drains. 4. Roof flashing assemblies. 5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 6. Flashing materials. DE 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKWATER VALVES A. Horizontal, Cast -Iron Backwater Valves 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.14.1. 3. Size: Same as connected piping. 4. Body: Cast iron. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES BGCE 15155-1 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 5. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve. 6. End Connections: Hub and spigot or hubless. 7. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified to hang open for airflow unless subject to backflow condition. 8. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full -size, cast -iron, soil -pipe extension to field- installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover. B. Drain - Outlet Backwater Valves : Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. C. Watts Drainage Products Inc. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet. 3. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drain. 4. Check Valve: Removable ball float. 5. Inlet: Threaded. 6. Outlet: Threaded or spigot. 2.2 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Cast -Iron Cleanouts : Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk or raised -head, brass plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. B. Cast -Iron Floor Cleanouts : SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15155-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Oatey. C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 6. Clamping Device: Not required. 7. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set - screws or other device. 8. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel- bronze, copper alloy. 9. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 10. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. 11. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast -iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. C. Cast -Iron Wall Cleanouts : Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk or raised -head, cast -iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome - plated brass or stainless -steel cover plate with screw. 8. Wall Access: Round, nickel- bronze, copper - alloy, or stainless -steel wall - installation frame and cover. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15155-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.3 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES A. Roof Flashing Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor /Stoneman Div. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938- inch - thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 10 inchesfrom pipe, with galvanized -steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting. 1. Open -Top Vent Cap: Without cap. 2. Low - Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal -proof vent cap. 3. Extended Vent Cap: With .field- installed, vandal -proof vent cap. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Open Drains: 1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub -and- spigot, cast -iron, soil -pipe fittings. Include P -trap, hub - and - spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated. B. Deep -Seal Traps: 1. Description: Cast -iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap -seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. a. NPS 2: 4 -inch- minimum water seal. b. NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: 5 -inch- minimum water seal. C. Floor- Drain, Trap -Seal Primer Fittings : 1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap -seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet. D. Air -Gap Fittings: SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15155-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Standard: ASME Al 12.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping. 2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect waste piping. E. Sleeve Flashing Device : 1. Description: Manufactured, cast -iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized -steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 1 inchabove finished floor and galvanized -steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab. 2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping. F. Stack Flashing Fittings: 1. Description: Counterflashing -type, cast -iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. G. Vent Caps: 1. Description: Cast -iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal -proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. 2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch thickness. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0- lb /sq. ft., 0.0469 -inch thickness. 3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938 -inch thickness. B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. C. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloy. E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC -Paint 12, solvent -type, bituminous mastic. PART 3 - EXECUTION SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES BGCE 15155-5 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing. C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. C. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1 -inch total depression. 3. Install floor -drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. H. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inchabove floor. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15155-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 J. Install deep -seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated. K. Install floor- drain, trap -seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap -seal primer connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap -seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. L. Install air -gap fittings on draining -type backflow preventers and on indirect -waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system. M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. N. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. O. Install grease interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow - control fitting, according to authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing. 1. Above -Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension, if required, with cover flush with finished floor. 3. Recessed. Floor Installation: Set unit in receiver housing having bottom or cradle supports, with receiver housing cover flush with finished floor. 4. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout on outlet. P. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938 -inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch thickness or thinner. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15155-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counter flashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast -iron sleeve having calking recess. 3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic - laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each grease interceptor. B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 15 Section " Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 15155 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15155-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 15160 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. B. Related Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Storm Drainage" for storm drainage piping outside the building. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality- control reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF /ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF- drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF- sewer" for plastic sewer piping. NT&A>iAsa3i]001441K 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 HUB - AND - SPIGOT, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15160-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.3 HUBLESS, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. CISPI, Hubless- Piping Couplings: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ANACO- Husky. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. C. Fernco Inc. d. Matco - Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless -steel corrugated shield with stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 2.5 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Fitting -Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified - piping- system fitting. 3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15160 -'2 1J BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Femco Inc. 3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. C. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion- resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. C. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full - length, corrosion - resistant outer shield and corrosion- resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 r_11 3.2 EARTH MOVING Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15160-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. J. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. K. Install cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron.Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. M. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. N. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force -main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 3. Install drains in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15160-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 drains specified in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. P. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Q. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil piping with gasketed joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. B. Join hubless, cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless- piping coupling joints. C. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828 procedure. Use ASTM B 813, water- flushable, lead -free flux and ASTM B 32, lead- free -alloy solder. D. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. E. Plastic, Nonpressure- Piping, Solvent- Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe - handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes. 3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION A. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Unshielded Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15160-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Install carbon -steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install stainless -steel fiberglass pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments. 3. Install carbon -steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 4. Install stainless -steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments. 5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 6. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. C. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods. E. Install hangers for cast -iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4 -inch rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8 -inch rod. 6. Spacing for 10 -foot pipe lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. F. Install supports for vertical cast -iron soil piping every 15 feet. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15160-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 G. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4 -inch rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8 -inch rod. H. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches. I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties. 1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 2. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor in pit with pit cover flush with floor. 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves cleanouts specified in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15160-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 closing -in after roughing -in. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Re- inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for re- inspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 -foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. cWI =9]IW_\zII T1 Eel A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. al %liz reVielmo 1 :1 WIN 2 A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless- piping couplings; and coupled joints. C. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following: STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15160-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless- piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe - Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. D. Underground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed calking materials; and calked joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless- piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe - Material Couplings: Unshielded Shielded, non - pressure transition couplings. END OF SECTION 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15160-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 0 SECTION 15165 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof drains. 2. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Backwater valves. 5. Flashing materials. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS A. Cast -Iron, Large -Sump, General- Purpose Roof Drains: 1. Standard: ASME Al 12.6.4, for general - purpose roof drains. 2. Body Material: Cast iron. 3. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required. 4. Outlet: Bottom. 5. Extension Collars: Not required. 6. Under deck Clamp: Required. 7. Expansion Joint: Not required. 8. Sump Receiver Plate: Required. 9. Dome Material: Cast iron. 10. Perforated Gravel Guard: Stainless steel. 11. Vandal -Proof Dome: Not required. 12. Water Dam: Not required. B. Cast -Iron, Medium -Sump, General- Purpose Roof Drains Insert drawing designation if any: STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15165-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 1. Standard: ASME Al 12.6.4, for general - purpose roof drains. 2. Body Material: Cast iron. 3. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required. 4. Flow - Control Weirs: Not required. 5. Outlet: Bottom. 6. Extension Collars: Not required. 7. Under deck Clamp: Required. 8. Expansion Joint: Not required. 9. Sump Receiver Plate: Required. 10. Dome Material: Cast iron. 11. Wire Mesh: Stainless steel or brass over dome. 12. Perforated Gravel Guard: Stainless steel. 13. Vandal -Proof Dome: Not required. 14. Water Dam: Not required. C. Cast -Iron, Small -Sump, General- Purpose Roof Drains : 1. Standard: ASME Al 12.6.4, for general - purpose roof drains. 2. Body Material: Cast iron. 3. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Not required. 4. Outlet: Bottom. 5. Extension Collars: Not required. 6. Under deck Clamp: Required. 7. Expansion Joint: Not required. 8. Sump Receiver Plate: Required. 9. Dome Material: Cast iron. 10. Wire Mesh: Stainless steel or brass over dome. 11. Vandal -Proof Dome: Not required. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Downspout Adaptors: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Description: Manufactured, gray -iron casting, for attaching to horizontal - outlet, parapet roof drain and to exterior, sheet metal downspout. 2. Size: Inlet size to match parapet drain outlet. B. Downspout Boots: Description: Manufactured, ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray -iron casting, with strap or ears for attaching to building; NPS 4 outlet; and shop - applied bituminous coating. Size: Inlet size to match downspout and NPS 4outlet. C. Conductor Nozzles: 1. Description: Bronze body with threaded inlet and bronze wall flange with mounting holes. 2. Size: Same as connected conductor. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15165-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 2.3 CLEANOUTS A. Floor Cleanouts : PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M, for adjustable housing cleanouts. 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Type: Adjustable housing. 4. Body or Ferrule Material: Stainless steel. 5. Clamping Device: Required. 6. Closure: Cast -iron plug. 7. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 8. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel- bronze, copper alloy. 9. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 10. Top- Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. 11. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast -iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. B. Test Tees : 1. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or CISPI 301, for cleanout test tees. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body Material: Hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil -pipe T- branch or hubless, cast -iron soil -pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 4. Closure Plug: Countersunk or raised head, brass. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. C. Wall Cleanouts : 1. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body Material: Hubless, cast -iron soil -pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 4. Closure: Countersunk or raised -head, cast -iron plug. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome - plated brass or stainless -steel cover plate with screw. 7. Wall Access: Round, nickel- bronze, copper - alloy, or stainless -steel wall - installation frame and cover. 2.4 BACKWATER VALVES A. Cast -Iron, Horizontal Backwater Valves : 1. Standard: ASME All 12.14.1, for backwater valves. 2. Size: Same as connected piping. 3. Body Material: Cast iron. 4. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15165-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 5. End Connections: hubless. 6. Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified to hang open for airflow unless subject to backflow condition. 7. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full -size, cast -iron soil -pipe extension to field- installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover. 2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/6 152M, 12 oz. /sq. ft. B. Zinc - Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04 -inch minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill - phosphatized finish for painting if indicated. C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40 -mil minimum thickness. D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloy. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 7 Sections. 1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets. 3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance. B. Install downspout adapters on outlet of back - outlet parapet roof drains and connect to sheet metal downspouts. C. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade. D. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15165-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. E. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. F. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. G. Install horizontal backwater valves in floor with cover flush with floor. H. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated. J. Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with waterproof membrane. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0938 -inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0625 -inch thickness or thinner. 2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10 inches and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors"and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15165-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.4 PROTECTION PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 15165 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15165-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special -duty valves, and specialties for the following: 1. Hot -water heating piping. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature: 1. Hot -Water Heating Piping: 150 psigat 200 deg F. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement. 2. Pressure -seal fittings. 3. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated - orifice balancing valves and automatic flow - control valves. 4. Air control devices. 5. Hydronic specialties. B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1 /4scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn- Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L. B. Annealed- Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K. C. Wrought- Copper Fittings: ASME 1316.22. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. C. Victaulic Company. 4. Grooved -End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting. 5. Grooved - End -Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting. Ductile -iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts. D. Wrought- Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. B. Cast -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. C. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME 816.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. D. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME 816.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. E. Cast -Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25,125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. F. Grooved Mechanical -Joint Fittings and Couplings: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Central Sprinkler Company; a division of Tyco Fire & Building Products. C. National Fittings, Inc. d. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. e. Victaulic Company. 4. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65 -45 -12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved -end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. 5. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable -iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure- responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast -iron and cast - bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe - Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water - flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg -1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Fittings: HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. b. IPEX Inc. C. KBi. 3. CPVC and PVC one -piece fitting with one threaded brass or copper insert and one Schedule 80 solvent- cement -joint end. B. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Unions: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. b. IPEX Inc. C. KBi. d. NIBCO INC. 3. MSS SP -107, CPVC and PVC union. Include brass or copper end, Schedule 80 solvent- cement -joint end, rubber gasket, and threaded union. 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. C. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matco - Norca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. C. End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. 2.6 VALVES A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Valves." B. Automatic Temperature - Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls." C. Bronze, Calibrated- Orifice, Balancing Valves: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. C. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. 2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. D. Cast -Iron or Steel, Calibrated - Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. C. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. HYDRONIC PIPING BGCE 15181-5 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 2. Body: Cast -iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Stem Seals: EPDM O- rings. 5. Disc: Glass and carbon - filled PTFE. 6. Seat: PTFE. 7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. E. Diaphragm- Operated, Pressure - Reducing Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. C. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon - filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O- rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Low inlet - pressure check valve. 8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. F. Diaphragm- Operated Safety Valves: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. C. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon - filled PTFE. F] HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O- rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. 8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. G. Automatic Flow - Control Valves: Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls. 2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass -alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations. 8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F. 2.7 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amtrol, Inc. 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 4. Taco. C. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. D. Expansion Tanks: 1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125 -psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 2. Air - Control Tank Fitting: Cast -iron body, copper - plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainless -steel ball check, 100 -gal. unit only; sized for compression - tank diameter. Provide tank fittings for 125 -psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. 3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125 -psig working pressure and 240 deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system. 4. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4- inch - diameter gage glass, and slotted -metal glass guard. E. In -Line Air Separators: 1. Tank: One -piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation. 2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig. 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F 2.8 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Y- Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NIPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless -steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. B. Stainless -Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless -steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire - reinforcing protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4 -inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. C. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 15 Section 'Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops." HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Hot -water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L, drawn - temper copper tubing, wrought- copper fittings, and soldered brazed pressure -seal joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 125, cast -iron 150, malleable -iron 300, malleable - iron fittings; cast -iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints. B. Hot -water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L, drawn - temper copper tubing, wrought- copper fittings, and soldered brazed joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought -steel fittings and wrought -cast or forged -steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. 3. ' Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved, mechanical joints. C. Hot -Water Heating Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K, annealed - temper copper tubing, wrought - copper fittings, and soldered brazed joints. Use the fewest possible joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff -duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment. B. Install calibrated - orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main. C. Install calibrated- orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal. D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. E. Install safety valves at hot -water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip -pan elbow on safety -valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. F. Install pressure- reducing valves at makeup -water connection to regulate system fill pressure. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Install piping to allow application of insulation. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using [mechanically formed] tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install valves according to Division 15 Section "Valves." Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-10 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure- reducing valve, solenoid valve, in -line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. T. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops." U. Identify piping as specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP -58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper -clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe. C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. NPS 1 -1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-11 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2 -1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. D. Install hangers for drawn- temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1 -1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2 -1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10- footintervals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead -free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper - phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 131.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove buns and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-12 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 welds. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. H. Plastic Piping Solvent- Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe - handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved -end fittings and rigid, grooved -end- pipe couplings. Mechanically Formed, Copper- Tube - Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer - recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints. 3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat - transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. C. Install in -line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger. D. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from main with full -size, full -port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full -size, full -port, ball valve. E. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose. 2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and structural members. 3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-13 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one -third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME 831.9, "Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. C. Perform the following before operating the system: Open manual valves fully. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-14 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 3. Set makeup pressure- reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. END OF SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING 15181-15 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 15195 - FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Operating- Pressure Ratings: 1. Piping and Valves: 100 psigminimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psigminimum unless otherwise indicated. B. Natural -Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural -gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural -gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. C. Delegated- Design Submittal: For natural -gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. D. Welding certificates. E. Operation and maintenance data. FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 15195-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.101 A M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought -Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass -to -iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory- applied, three -layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE. a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat - shrink PE sleeves. B. Annealed- Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K. 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, and streamlined pattern. 2. Flare Fittings: Comply with ASME 816.26 and SAE J513. a. Copper fittings with long nuts. b. Metal -to -metal compression seal without gasket. C. Dryseal threads complying with ASME 61.20.3. Protective Coating for Underground Tubing: Factory- applied, extruded PE a minimum of 0.022 inch thick. 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. Indoor, Fixed - Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable- Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless -steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating- Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 15195-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 6. End Fittings: Zinc - coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME 131.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches. B. Quick- Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41. 1. Copper -alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable. C. Y- Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless -steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. D. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable -iron increaser fitting with corrosion - resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross - sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded -end connection. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/1310.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with'melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited. 2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services. B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B 16.33. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME 131.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground LL FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING BGCE 15195-3 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1 -1/4 inches to NIPS 2shall have initials "WOG' permanently marked on valve body. C. One - Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP -110. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. C. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome - plated brass. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable -stem packing threaded ends. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. D. Two - Piece, Full -Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP -110. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. C. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome - plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats; Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded -body packnut design with adjustable -stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 15195-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG' indicated on valve body. E. Two - Piece, Regular -Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP -110. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. C. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome - plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE. 6. Packing: Threaded -body packnut design with adjustable -stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG' indicated on valve body. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP -78. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS land smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG' indicated on valve body. FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 15195-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO G. Valve Boxes: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Cast -iron, two- section box. 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter. 4. Adjustable cast -iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Include tee - handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head, and with stem of length required to operate valve. 2.5 MOTORIZED GAS VALVES A. Electrically Operated Valves: Comply with UL 429. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Division of Emerson. b. Dungs, Karl, Inc. C. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Goyen Valve Corp.; Tyco Environmental Systems. e. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. f. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Skinner Valve Div. g. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Pilot operated. 3. Body: Brass or aluminum. 4. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber. 5. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel. 6. 120 -V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous -duty molded coil, and replaceable. 7. NEMA ICS 6, Type 4, coil enclosure. 8. Normally closed. 9. Visual position indicator. 2.6 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion- resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller. B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 15195-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO but are not limited to, the following: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. C. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. e. Invensys. f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die -cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc - plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc - plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet - stabilized, mineral - filled nylon. 8. Single -port, self- contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field- installed, stainless -steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 10 psig. C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Canadian Meter Company Inc. b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div. C. Harper Wyman Co. d. Maxitrol Company. e. SCP, Inc. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die -cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc - plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc - plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet - stabilized, mineral - filled nylon. 7. Factory- Applied Finish: Minimum three -layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig5 psig. FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING BGCE 15195-7 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.7 DIELECTRIC UNIONS A. Dielectric Unions: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. C. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matco - Norca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. C. End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. 2.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali- resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural -gas piping. B. Install underground, PE, natural -gas piping according to ASTM D 2774. C. Steel Piping with Protective Coating: 1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe. D. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating: FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 15195-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. F. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages." 3.2 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural -gas piping. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. G. Locate valves for easy access. H. Install natural -gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps. Install piping free of sags and bends. J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas -fired appliances and equipment for roughing -in requirements. M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service -meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 15195-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view. P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. S. Do not use natural -gas piping as grounding electrode. T. Install strainer on inlet of each line- pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve. U. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages." V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." 3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless - steel tubing or copper connector. B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing. C. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping. 3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING BGCE 15195-10 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. D. Welded Joints: 1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. 2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory- applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. F. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten. G. PE Piping Heat - Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1 -1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 15195-11 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.6 CONNECTIONS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. B. Install natural -gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70. C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances. D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas -fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment. E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance. 3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for piping and valve identification. B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Natural -gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.9 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE A. Aboveground natural -gas piping shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints. 3. Annealed- temper copper tube with wrought - copper fittings and brazed joints. B. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping. 3.10 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 15195-12 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS land smaller shall be one of the following: 1. Annealed- temper copper tube with wrought - copper fittings and brazed joints. 2. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints. B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following: Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints. Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints. C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought - steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping. D. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded or wrought -steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping. 3.11 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. One - piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two - piece, regular -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. One - piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two - piece, regular -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: One - piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. Two - piece, regular -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. Bronze plug valve. END OF SECTION 15195 FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING 15195-13 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 15300 —FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT INCLUDES A. Design and Install Sprinkler Systems: 1. Wet pipe system with automatic sprinklers. 2. Dry pipe system with automatic sprinklers. 3. Standpipe and Hose System: a. Dry, with manually operated control devices. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are a part of these Specifications. Consult them for further instruction and be governed by the requirements thereunder. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI /ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300. B. ANSI /ASME Section 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. C. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - coated Welded and Seamless. D. AWS D10.9 - Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing. E. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. F. NFPA 14 – Installation of standpipe and hose systems. 1.4 COVERAGE A. Provide wet pipe fire protection system(s) for the entire facility. B. Provide dry pipe fire protection system(s) for those areas subject to freezing, as determined by local jurisdiction. C. Confirm hazard classifications with the authority having jurisdiction. D. Refer to mechanical plans for fire sprinkler riser locations and on -site fire mains. Field verify piping mains to be utilized for project. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15300-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design and installation to conform. 1. NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems 2. NFPA 14 for standpipes. 3. ASME 831.9 for piping. B. Equipment and Components: Bear UL /FM label or marking. C. Specialist Firm: Company specializing in sprinkler systems with five years experience. D. The designer shall be registered with the State of Colorado as a Professional Engineer or Nicet Class III Engineering Technician. The plans shall bear that stamp. E. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories. F. Weld materials and procedures shall conform to ASME Code. G. Employ certified welders in accordance with ANSI /ASME Section 9. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Hydraulic calculations, product data, and shop drawings shall bear the stamp of approval of the authority having jurisdiction. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, pipe materials used, jointing methods, floor and wall penetration seals, valve data and ratings, components and accessories. C. Submit shop drawings, product data and hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place, under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures. Maintain in place until installation. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15300-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.9 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit documents under provisions of Division 1. 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements, and Record Drawings. 1.11 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFPA 13. B. Provide suitable wrenches for each head type. C. Provide metal storage cabinet in location designated. 19-11:41 WAS 0 2*1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Piping Outside Building 1. All pipe outside the building to the service termination inside the building: 4" and larger, Class 50, 350 psi pressure rating, ductile iron mechanical joint, push -on joint or equivalent. 3" and smaller; Type "K" hard drawn copper. B. Pipe and Fittings Inside the Building 1. Piping materials; designed for 175 psi working pressure, conforming to ASTM specifications and to have the manufacturer's name or brand, along with the applicable ASTM standard, marked on each length of pipe. a. Pipe; Schedule 40, black steel pipe, ASTM n u 1) Al20 or A53 joined by screwed joints, welded joints, or by mechanical grooved couplings or push -on couplings jointed by UL and FM approved combination of couplings, gaskets and grooves where approved by authority having jurisdiction. b. Sprinkler piping that is exposed to the weather, or used in a corrosive atmosphere shall be galvanized. C. Tubing shall be copper, Type "K" or "L ", suitable to withstand water working pressure not less than 175 psi joined by brazed joints except solder joints may be permitted for wet pipe systems in Light Hazard occupancies where temperature classification of the installed sprinklers is ordinary or intermediate. Solder joints may also be permitted for wet pipe systems in FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS BGCE 15300-3 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 Ordinary Hazard - Group 1 occupancies where piping is concealed. Brazing filler metal shall be classification BCUP -3 or BCUP -4 in accordance with AWS A5.8. Solder metal shall be 95 -5 (tin antimony - Grade 95 TA) in accordance with ASTM B32. d. Where pressures are between 175 psi and 300 psi, standard wall pipe and 300 psi W.O.G. valves shall be used as permitted by ANSI Standards. 2.2 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions: 150 psi malleable iron for threaded ferrous piping. B. Flanges: 150 psi forged steel slip -on flanges for ferrous piping. C. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized pipe. 2.3 GATE VALVES A. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, OS &Y, solid wedge. 2.4 CHECK VALVES A. Bronze, swing disc. B. Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat. C. Iron body, bronze trim spring loaded, renewable composition disc. 2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Iron body, bronze disc and stem resilient replaceable liner seat. 2.6 DRAIN VALVES A. Bronze compression stop with nipple and cap or hose thread. B. Brass ball valve with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread. 2.7 VALVE OPERATORS A. Provide handwheels for gate and drain valves. B. For butterfly valves provide level lock handle with toothed plate. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15300-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 2.8 VALVE CONNECTIONS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Provide valve connections to match pipe joints. Use valves of pipe size. B. Provide butterfly valve with tapped lug body when used for isolating service. 2.9 PIPES AND FITTINGS: A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C115, ductile -iron barrel with iron -alloy threaded flanges. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 in sizes 6 inches and small, Schedule 30 in sizes 8 inches and larger, black and galvanized. C. Fittings: Suitable for service class and piping type; threaded, grooved -end, press -seal types. D. Joining Materials: Welding and gasket materials suitable for design temperatures and pressures. Victaulic materials and couplings. 2.10 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Alarm Horn /Strobe: Electric type, by Fire Alarm Contractor. B. Flow Switch: Vane type with retard chamber. C. Backflow Preventers: ASSE, sized for maximum flow rate and maximum pressure loss. D. Fire Department connections: UL 405, fire approved exposed, wall type unit, connections and finish suitable for use. E. Alarm Devices: Water- motor - operated alarms, waterflow indicators, pressure switches, and supervisory switches. F. Pressure Gages: UL 393. G. Automatic ball drip, Potter Roemer Series 5980, Croker- Standard 148 or 187, or equivalent. 2.11 AIR COMPRESSOR A. Single unit, electric motor driven, ASME rated horizontal receiver tank, air pressure operated electric switch motor, safety valves, check valves, automatic tank drain, muffler - filter, belt guard, and controls. B. Electrical characteristics of air compressors shall be 115V/60/1. Include conduit and wiring to nearest circuit breaker. C. Provide air pressure maintenance device(s) as required. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15300-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 2.12 SPRINKLER HEADS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Recessed pendant type with white finish, with matching escutcheon. B. Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type. C. Sidewall Type: White finish with matching escutcheon. D. Fusible Link: Temperature rated for specific area hazard. E. Guards: Finish matching sprinkler head. F. Provide escutcheons for all heads located in areas with finished ceilings. 2.13 HOSE VALVES A. Hose valve for fire department use (where pressure is 100 psi or higher) Croker- Standard 457, Potter Roemer 4053 or equivalent (to fit 9" deep cabinet) 2 -1/2" (inlet and outlet) adjustable pressure regulating angle hose valve for direct connection to high pressure fire protection water riser. Valve shall be bronze U.L. listed with cap and chain. B. Hose valve for fire department use (where pressure is less than 100 psi) Potter Roemer Series 4065, Croker- Standard 157 or equivalent. 2 -1/2" angle hose valve. Valve to be bronze with cap and chain. 2.14 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide a check valve with ball drip in line in fire department connection and a flush two way connection, polished brass. Wall plate shall have 1" high letters and read "Auto Sprinklers and Standpipe ". 2.15 WATER FLOW INDICATORS A. Provide water flow indicators in each standpipe riser system and on each automatic sprinkler system. 2.16 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Provide pressure gauges as required. U.L. Listed 4 -1/2" dial type with a maximum limit of not less than twice the normal working pressure. 2.17 VALVE SUPERVISION A. Monitor all water supply shut off valves for the Fire Protection Systems where shown on drawings with valve supervisor. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15300-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.18 DRY PIPE VALVE: A. UL listed, FM approved. Provide with drip check valve, drain cup, reset bar, alarm test shut off valve and drain check valve, and accelerator if required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICE A. Fumish water service from the main to a flange inside the building wall. Connect to flange and provide completed systems throughout the building. B. The Contractor shall run all fire lines on site including valves and fire hydrants as shown on drawings. C. Pipe passing under building grade beams shall have a 6" minimum clearance to prevent possible damage from building settlement. D. All valves to be provided with cast iron valve box, extension top and cover marked with letter "W ". E. Piping outside the building shall have not less than four feet six inches of cover from finished grade. Surround pipe with 4" of clean sand. F. Provide backflow preventer assembly at fire entry piping assembly. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work. B. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter. C. Remove burrs and bevel plain end ferrous pipe. D. Remove scale and foreign material, inside and outside, before assembly. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Locate outside alarm on building wall. Obtain approval of location from Architect and Authority. B. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. C. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. D. Center heads in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable, dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements. it FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15300-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 E. Apply strippable tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head cover plates do not receive field paint finish. F. When sprinkler heads are installed where they may be exposed or subjected to mechanical damage, furnish head guards. G. Provide sleeves for pipe passing through building walls and floors above grade, sleeves of standard weight steel pipe. The annular spaces between pipe and sleeves shall be packed tight with caulking. Provide chrome plated escutcheon plates large enough to cover the pipe sleeve. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Screw joint steel piping up to and including 2 inch diameter. Weld piping 2 -1/2 inch diameter and larger, including branch connections. B. Mechanical grooved joints may be used instead of threaded or welded joints. C. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non -toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. D. Coat threaded ends with pipe lubricant compound. E. In steel piping, main sized saddle branch connections or direct connection of branch lines to mains is permitted if main is one pipe size larger than the branch for up to 6 inch mains. Do not project branch pipes inside the main pipe. F. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems. G. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. H. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetration to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. 3.5 INSTALLATION - VALVES A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Provide gate valves for shut -off or isolating service. C. Where approved, butterfly valves may be used instead of gate valves. D. Provide drain valves at main shut -off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. E. Provide locking devices with alarm functions on all valves where required per code or by authority having jurisdiction. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15300-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.6 INSTALLATION - SPRINKLER HEADS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Coordinate sprinkler head layout with Architect prior to submission of drawings and hydraulic calculations. Obtain from Architect prior to beginning work. 3.7 INSTALLATION - AIR COMPRESSOR A. Install air compressor on vibration isolators per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.8 CLEANING A. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. 3.9 SYSTEM TESTS A. Hydrostatically test entire system. B. Test shall be witnessed by Authority Having Jurisdiction. Perform all tests as required by Vail Fire and Emergency services. 3.10 PIPE SUPPORTS A. All piping shall be supported by means of hangers tested and listed as approved by UL and /or FM. Sizing, spacing, and installation shall be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 13, "Sprinkler Systems," except as otherwise shown on Drawings or specified herein. �c�iilts_1>�.��iI•� A. By Fire Alarm Contractor. 3.12 DRAWOFFS AND DRAINS A. Install all sprinkler branches and piping to drain to the main line on supply riser with 2" discharge pipe running to outside. Test line to drain by gravity to prevent freezing. 3.13 ZONE SPRINKLER CONTROL ASSEMBLY A. Provide and install control assembly for each sprinkler zone. Control assembly shall include shut off valve pressure regulating valve set at 175 psi where pressure exceeds 175 psi, water flow indicator, pressure relief valve set at 175 psi, test valve, drain valve, sight glass, and orificed union (size of orifice to be the same as sprinkler head orifice). FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15300-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.14 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. The sprinkler system is based on the following criteria: 1. Light Hazard occupancy with quick response head for all dwelling units. 2. Light Hazard occupancy for public, common and office areas. 3. Ordinary Hazard Group I for the parking garage and retail areas. 4. Ordinary Hazard Group II for trash rooms, boiler rooms, pool equipment rooms and other similar spaces. 3.15 INSTRUCTION A. When required approvals of this work have been obtained, and at time designated by the Owner, demonstrate to the Owner's personnel the operation and maintenance and demonstrate the contents of the approval manual. 3.16 HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall prepare hydraulic calculations for the design of the system and submit for approval. Submittals shall include but not be limited to: 1. Computer printout sheets or hand calculation sheets with all calculations. 2. Cross reference points of calculations both on the drawings and in the calculations by symbol or number. END OF SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15300-10 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 15446 - SUMP PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submersible sump pumps. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor - operated water pumps. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS A. Submersible, Fixed - Position, Single -Seal Sump Pumps: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Barnes; Crane Pumps & Systems. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation. C. Flo Fab Inc. d. Glentronics, Inc. e. Goulds Pumps; ITT Corporation. f. Grundfos Pumps Corp. g. Liberty Pumps. h. Little Giant Pump Co. i. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. SUMP PUMPS 15446-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 j. Pentair Pump Group; Hydromatic Pumps. k. Pentair Pump Group; Myers. I. Stancor, Inc. m. Sta -Rite Industries, Inc. n. Weil Pump Company, Inc. o. Weinman Division; Crane Pumps & Systems. p. Zoeller Company. 2. Description: Factory- assembled and - tested sump -pump unit. 3. Pump Type: Submersible, end - suction, single- stage, close - coupled, overhung - impeller, centrifugal sump pump as defined in HI 1.1 -1.2 and HI 1.3. 4. Pump Casing: Cast iron, with strainer inlet, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge for piping connection. 5. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel or steel, with factory- sealed, grease - lubricated ball bearings. 6. Seal: Mechanical. 7. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor -start type; with built -in overload protection; lifting eye or lug; and three - conductor, waterproof power cable of length required and with grounding plug and cable - sealing assembly for connection at pump. 8. Controls: a. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Switch Type: Pedestal- mounted float switch with float rods and rod buttons. C. Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and start multiple pumps if one cannot handle load. d. Float Guides: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth greater than 60 inches. e. High -Water Alarm: Cover - mounted, compression -probe alarm, with electric bell; 120 -V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell. 9. Controls: a. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1; wall- mounted. b. Switch Type: Mechanical -float type, in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures with mounting rod and electric cables. C. High -Water Alarm: Rod - mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with mechanical -float, mercury-float, or pressure switch matching control and electric bell; 120 -V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell. 10. Control- Interface Features: a. Remote Alarm Contacts: For remote alarm interface. 2.2 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment." SUMP PUMPS 15446-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections. B. Motors for submersible pumps shall be hermetically sealed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavation and filling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Pump Installation Standard: Comply with HI 1.4 for installation of sump pumps. END OF SECTION 15446 SUMP PUMPS 15446-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 15450 - POTABLE -WATER STORAGE TANKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel, pressure, potable -water storage tanks. 2. Insulated, steel, potable -water storage tanks. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product certificates. C. Purging and disinfecting reports. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance for Steel Tanks: Fabricate and label steel, ASME -code, potable - water storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, 'Pressure Vessels," Division 1. B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for potable -water storage tanks. Include appropriate NSF marking. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL, PRESSURE, POTABLE -WATER STORAGE TANKS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Adamson Global Technology Corporation. 2. Aldrich Company, Inc. 3. Cemline Corporation. 4. Flo Fab Inc. 5. GSW Water Heating. 6. HESCO Bastion Ltd. 7. Lochinvar Corporation. 8. Precision Boilers. 9. PVI Industries, LLC. POTABLE -WATER STORAGE TANKS 15450-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 10. Raypak. 11. RBI; a Mestek company. 12. RECO USA. 13. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation. 14. State Industries, Inc. 15. Weben- Jarco, Inc. 16. Wendland Manufacturing Corp. 17. Wessels Company. 18. Wood, John Co. B. Description: Steel, vertical, pressure -rated tank with cylindrical sidewalls. C. Construction: ASME code, steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for 150 - psigworking pressure. D. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than 36 inchesin diameter; same pressure rating as tank. E. Tappings: Factory- fabricated stainless steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B1.20.1, with female thread. 2. NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.5, flanged. F. Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in tank and the following: 1. Pressure relief valve. 2. Pressure gage. 3. Thermometer. 4. Air - charging connection. 5. Gage glass, brass fittings, compression stops, and gage -glass guard. G. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory- fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank before testing and labeling. H. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable -water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. 2.2 INSULATED, STEEL, POTABLE -WATER STORAGE TANKS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. GSW Water Heating. 2. HESCO Bastion Ltd. 3. Laars Heating Systems Company. 4.. Lochinvar Corporation. POTABLE -WATER STORAGE TANKS BGCE 15450-2 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 5. Precision Boilers. 6. PVI Industries, LLC. 7. RBI; a Mestek company. 8. Rheem Manufacturing Company. 9. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation. 10. State Industries, Inc. 11. Vaughn Manufacturing Corporation. 12. Wessels Company. B. Description: Steel, vertical, pressure -rated tank with cylindrical sidewalls. C. Construction: ASME code, steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for 150 - psigworking pressure. D. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than 36 inches in diameter; same pressure rating as tank. E. Tappings: Factory- fabricated stainless steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME 131.20.1, with female thread. 2. NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.5, flanged. F. Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in tank and the following: 1. Pressure relief valve. 2. Pressure gage. 3. Thermometer. 4. Air - charging connection. 5. Gage glass, brass fittings, compression stops, and gage -glass guard. G. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory- fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank before testing and labeling. H. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable -water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. Insulation: Factory- installed fiberglass or polyurethane foam; surrounding entire tank except connections and other openings; suitable for tank operating temperature; and complying with ASHRAE /IESNA 90.1. J. Jacket: Steel, with manufacturer's standard finish unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect potable -water storage tanks according to the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Pressure Testing for ASME -Code, Potable -Water Storage Tanks: Hydrostatically POTABLE -WATER STORAGE TANKS 15450-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 test to ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks. Fill tanks with water, vent air, pressurize to 1 -1/2 times tank pressure rating, disconnect test equipment, hold pressure for 30 minutes with no drop in pressure, and check for leaks. 2. Testing for Nonpressure, Potable -Water Storage Tanks: Fill tanks to water operating level to ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks. Hold water level for two hours with no drop in water level. B. Repair or replace tanks that fail test with new tanks, and repeat until test is satisfactory. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install water storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, firmly anchored. Arrange so devices needing servicing are accessible. B. Anchor tank supports and tanks to substrate. C. Install thermometers and pressure gages on water storage tanks and piping if indicated. Thermometers and pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping." D. Install the following devices on tanks where indicated: 1. Pressure relief valves. 2. Temperature and pressure relief valves. 3. Connections to accessories. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to potable -water storage tanks to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges and with shutoff valves. Connect tank drains with shutoff valves and discharge over closest floor drains. General -duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Gate or ball. b. Valves NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Gate or butterfly. C. Drain Valves: NPS 3/4 gate or ball valve. Include outlet with, or nipple in outlet with, ASME B1.20.7, 3/4- 11.5NH thread for garden -hose service, POTABLE -WATER STORAGE TANKS 15450-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 it threaded cap, and chain. 2. Water Piping Connections: Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping." 3. Connect air piping to hydropneumatic tanks with unions or flanges and gate or ball valves. Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric fittings, which are specified in Division 15 Section "General- Service Compressed -Air Piping." 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following final checks before filling: 1. Verify that air pre- charge in pre- charged tanks is correct. 2. Test operation of tank accessories and devices. 3. Verify that pressure relief valves have correct setting. a. Manually operate pressure relief valves. b. Adjust pressure settings. B. Filling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. Fill tanks with water to operating level. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable -water storage tanks. B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed, use procedure described in AWWA C652 or as described below: 1. Purge water storage tanks with potable water. 2. Disinfect tanks by one of the following methods: a. Fill tanks with water - chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours. b. Fill tanks with water - chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for three hours. 3. Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine is not present in water coming from tank. 4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination made by authorities having jurisdiction shows evidence of contamination. POTABLE -WATER STORAGE TANKS 15450-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Prepare written reports for purging and disinfecting activities. END OF SECTION 15450 POTABLE -WATER STORAGE TANKS 15450-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 15513 - CONDENSING BOILERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged, factory- fabricated and - assembled, gas - fired, water - jacketed condensing boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. ASHRAE /IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements." D. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N, "Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers." E. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial- Industrial Gas CONDENSING BOILERS 15513-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Heating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period for Water- Jacketed Condensing Boilers: a. Leakage and Materials: Eight years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Prorated for five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Viessmann Manufacturing Co. (US) Inc. 2. Patterson Kelley. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: Factory- fabricated, - assembled, and - tested, water - jacketed condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base; including insulated jacket; flue -gas vent; water supply, return, and condensate drain connections; and controls. Water heating service only. B. Heat Exchanger: Stainless -steel primary and secondary combustion chamber. C. Pressure Vessel: Carbon steel with welded heads and tube connections where not in contact with combustion or flue gases. D. Burner: Natural gas, forced draft; swing -open front and burner observation port. E. Blower: Centrifugal fan, forced draft. Include prepurge and postpurge of the combustion chamber. 1. Motors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Motors." Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. CONDENSING BOILERS 15513-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 F. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator. Include 100 percent safety shutoff with electronic flame supervision. G. Ignition: Electric -spark ignition with 100 percent main -valve shutoff with electronic flame supervision. H. Casing: 1. Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap -in or interlocking closures. 2. Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A. 3. Finish: Powder- coated protective finish. 4. Insulation: Minimum 4 -inch- thick, mineral -fiber insulation surrounding the heat exchanger. 5. Combustion -Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars. 6. Mounting base to secure boiler. 2.3 TRIM A. Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.1, "Power Piping." B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit. C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated. D. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3 -1/2 -inch- diameter, combination water - pressure and - temperature gage. Gages shall have operating - pressure and - temperature ranges so normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range. E. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic. F. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose -end gate valve. G. Circulation Pump: Non - overloading, in -line pump with split- capacitor motor having thermal - overload protection and lubricated bearings; designed to operate at specified boiler pressures and temperatures. 2.4 CONTROLS A. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features: 1. Control transformer. 2. Set -Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable. B. Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit burner operation. 1. High Cutoff: Automatic reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum boiler design temperature. 2. Low -Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low water. Cutoff switch shall be manual -reset type. CONDENSING BOILERS 15513-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual -reset pressure switch field mounted on boiler combustion -air inlet. 4. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm for above conditions. 2.5 ELECTRICAL POWER A. Single -Point Field Power Connection: Factory- installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single - point field power connection to boiler. 1. House in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 2. Wiring shall be numbered and color -coded to match wiring diagram. 3. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway. 4. Field power interface shall be to fused disconnect switch. 5. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with a disconnect switch or circuit breaker. 6. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test. B. Test and inspect factory- assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BOILER INSTALLATION A. Install boilers level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Vibration Isolation: Elastomeric mounts with a minimum static deflection of 0.25 inch. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." C. Install gas -fired boilers according to NFPA 54. D. Assemble and install boiler trim. E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted. F. Install control wiring to field- mounted electrical devices. CONDENSING BOILERS 15513-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.2 CONNECTIONS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance. C. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required. D. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." E. Connect gas piping to boiler gas -train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas train connection. Provide a reducer if required. F. Connect hot -water piping to supply- and retum - boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection. G. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain. H. Boiler Venting: Connect full size to boiler connections. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks." Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air -fuel ratio and combustion. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low -limit safety set points of fuel supply, water level, and water temperature. CONDENSING BOILERS 15513-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 b. Set field- adjustable switches and circuit - breaker trip ranges as indicated. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Video training sessions. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 15513 CONDENSING BOILERS 15513-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 15515 - WATER -TUBE BOILERS f910ffl wel: 4111 :12_ 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged, factory- fabricated and - assembled, gas - fired, finned water -tube boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. . 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. ASHRAE /IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements." D. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N, "Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers." E. 1 =B =R Compliance: Boilers shall be tested and rated according to HI's "Rating WATER -TUBE BOILERS 15515-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 Procedure for Heating Boilers" and "Testing Standard for Commercial Boilers," with 1 =B =R emblem on a nameplate affixed to boiler. F. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial- Industrial Gas Heating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace heat exchangers damaged by thermal shock and vent dampers of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Vent Dampers: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace drums, tubes, headers, cabinets, atmospheric gas burners, and pressure vessels of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Drums, Tubes, Headers, Cabinets, and Atmospheric Gas Burner: Five years from date of Substantial Completion, pro rata. 2. Warranty Period for Pressure Vessel: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion, for thermal shock. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Ajax Boiler Inc. 2. Allied Engineering Company; a division of E- Z -Rect Manufacturing Ltd. 3. Laars Heating Systems; a division of Waterpik Technologies, Inc. 4. Lochinvar Corporation. 5. Patterson - Kelley. 6. Precision Boilers. 7. Raypak. 8. RBI Water Heaters. 9. RECO USA. 10. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company. 11. Weben- Jarco, Inc. B. Description: Factory- fabricated, - assembled, and - tested boiler with tubes sealed into WATER -TUBE BOILERS 15515-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 headers pressure tight, and set on a steel base; including insulated jacket, flue -gas vent, combustion -air intake connections, water supply and return connections, and controls. C. Combustion Chamber Internal Insulation: Interlocking panels of refractory insulation, high- temperature cements, mineral fiber, and ceramic refractory tile for service temperatures to 2000 deg F. D. Casing: 1. Control Compartment Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1A. 2. Insulation: Minimum 1- inch - thick, mineral -fiber insulation surrounding the heat exchanger. 3. Draft Hood: Integral. 4. Combustion -Air Connection: Inlet duct collar and sheet metal closure over burner compartment. 5. Mounting base to secure boiler. E. Burner: Burner Tubes and Orifices: Stainless steel, for natural gas. a. Sealed Combustion: Factory- mounted centrifugal fan to draw outside air into boiler and discharge into burner compartment. b. Direct Vent: Factory- mounted centrifugal fan to draw flue gas out of boiler and discharge into boiler vent. 2. Vertical Burner: a. High- temperature stainless steel to fire in a 360- degree pattern. b. Burner shall have a viewing port for observation of burner operation and a factory- mounted centrifugal fan to supply outside air to boiler burner. C. Fan shall be controlled to prepurge and postpurge the combustion chamber before firing. 3. Gas Train: Control devices and full - modulation control sequence shall comply with requirements in ASME CSD -1 . In addition to these requirements, include shutoff cock, pressure regulator, and control valve. 4. Pilot: Standing pilot ignition with 100 percent main -valve and pilot- safety shutoff with electronic supervision of burner flame. 5. Flue -Gas Recirculation Fans: Centrifugal fans on burner assembly to recirculate flue gas to decrease oxides of nitrogen emissions to less than 30 ppm. Motors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." F. Trim: 1. Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit. 2. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated. 3. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3 -1/2 -inch- diameter, combination WATER -TUBE BOILERS 15515-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 water - pressure and - temperature gage. Gages shall have operating - pressure and - temperature ranges so normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range. 4. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic. 5. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose -end gate valve. 6. Circulation Pump: Non - overloading, in -line pump with split- capacitor motor having thermal - overload protection and lubricated bearings; designed to operate at specified boiler pressures and temperatures. 2.2 VENTING KITS A. Vent Damper: Motorized, UL listed for use on atmospheric burner boiler equipped with draft hood; motor to open and close damper; stainless -steel vent coupling and damper blade; keyed wiring harness connector plug; and dual - position switches to permit burner operation. B. Kit: Complete system, ASTM A 959, Type 294C stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal, thimble, indoor plate, vent adapter, condensate trap, and sealant. C. Combustion -Air Intake: Stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal with screen, inlet air coupling, and sealant. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect factory- assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. B. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BOILER INSTALLATION A. Install boilers level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Vibration Isolation: Elastomeric mounts with a minimum static deflection of 0.25 inch. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Install gas -fired boilers according to NFPA 54. D. Assemble and install boiler trim. E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted. WATER -TUBE BOILERS 15515-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 F. Install control wiring to field- mounted electrical devices. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect gas piping to boiler gas -train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas train connection. Provide a reducer if required. D. Connect hot -water piping to supply- and return - boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection. E. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain. F. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required. G. Boiler Flue Venting: 1. Install venting kit and combustion -air intake. _. 2. Connect full size to boiler connections. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks." H. Connect breeching to full size of boiler outlet. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for venting materials. I. Install flue -gas recirculation duct from vent to burner. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section 'Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for recirculation duct materials. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." K. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. 0 B. Tests and Inspections: Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. WATER -TUBE BOILERS BGCE 15515-5 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air -fuel ratio and combustion. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low -limit safety set points of fuel supply, water level, and water temperature. b. Set field - adjustable switches and circuit - breaker trip ranges as indicated. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Video training sessions. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." 1:.1 11161:i� WATER -TUBE BOILERS 15515-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 15550 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS PART 1 - GENERAL Yil if, I if, 1_1:Y7 A. This Section includes the following: 1. Listed double -wall vents. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. See Division 15 Section "Draft Control Devices" for induced -draft and mechanical fans and for motorized and barometric dampers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Building- heating - appliance chimneys. B. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 3i=7 :lei 01 "l6i 2.1 LISTED BUILDING - HEATING - APPLIANCE CHIMNEYS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Metal Products; MASCO Corporation. 2. Cleaver- Brooks; Div. of Aqua -Chem Inc. 3. FAMCO. 4. Hart & Cooley, Inc. 5. Heat -Fab, Inc. 6. Industrial Chimney Company. 7. LSP Products Group, Inc. 8. Metal -Fab, Inc. 9. Schebler Co. (The). 10. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate. 11. Simpson Dura -Vent Co., Inc.; Subsidiary of Simpson Manufacturing Co. 12. Tru -Flex Metal Hose Corp. 13. Van - Packer Company, Inc. B. Description: Double -wall metal vents tested according to UL 103 and UL 959 and rated for 1400 deg F continuously, or 1800 deg F for 10 minutes; with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211. BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15550-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1- inchannular space filled with high- temperature, ceramic -fiber insulation. D. Inner Shell: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel. E. Outer Jacket: Aluminized steel. F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft -hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent -pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly. 1. Termination: Stack cap designed to exclude minimum 90 percent of rainfall. 2. Termination: Round chimney top designed to exclude minimum 98 percent of rainfall. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent. B. Seal between sections of positive - pressure vents and grease exhaust ducts according to manufacturer's written installation instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer. C. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without exceeding appliance loading. D. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped to nearest drain. E. Lap joints in direction of flow. F. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. G. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth and apply touchup finish to match factory or shop finish. H. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed or connected to equipment. END OF SECTION 15550 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15550-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 15555 - DRAFT CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Barometric dampers. 2. Vent dampers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BAROMETRIC DAMPERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Babco Inc. 2. Bramec Corporation. 3. Effikal International Inc. 4. EXHAUSTO, Inc. 5. FAMCO. 6. Field Controls L.L.C.; Venting Solutions Company (The). 7. Quickdraft; a Litzler Company. 8. Snappy Air Distribution Products. 9. Tec -Air Inc. DRAFT CONTROL DEVICES 15555-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 10. Tjemlund Products, Inc. 11. Tutco, Inc.; Subsidiary of Smiths Industries. 12. Wing Draft Inducers; Subsidiary of Smiths Industries. C. Damper Construction: High- temperature - enamel - painted steel damper and housing with galvanized -steel breeching connection. Adjustable counterweight with lock. Include knife -edge bearings that do not require lubrication. 2.2 VENT DAMPERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 41 1. Effikal International Inc. 2. Field Controls L.L.C.; Venting Solutions Company (The). 3. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group. C. Damper Construction: Stainless -steel damper blade, shaft, and vent pipe with metal, prelubricated bearings. 1. Electric motor sized to power damper open and closed in approximately 15 seconds in each direction. Power is off when damper is at rest. 2. Comply with ANSI Z21.66. D. Controls: 1. Control transformer. 2. Keyed wiring harness. 3. Damper end - switch to prove damper is open. 4. Interlock with boiler to permit burner operation when damper is open. 5. Hold -open switch for troubleshooting boiler controls. 2.3 MOTORS A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install listed components in a manner complying with the listing. B. Secure barometric dampers to breechings with hardware compatible with connected materials. DRAFT CONTROL DEVICES 15555-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Locate barometric and motorized vent dampers as close to draft hood collar as possible. D. Secure barometric and motorized vent dampers to appliances, breechings, or chimneys with hardware compatible with connected materials. END OF SECTION 15555 DRAFT CONTROL DEVICES 15555-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 15762 - UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and hot -water coils. 2. Propeller unit heaters with hot -water coils. iiw�lig13IIIaIF -A> & PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Location and size of each field connection. 3. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CABINET UNIT HEATERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Airtherm; a Mestek Company. 2. Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 3. Carrier Corporation. 4. Chromalox, Inc.; a division of Emerson Electric Company. UNIT HEATERS 15762-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 5. Dunham -Bush, Inc. 6. Engineered Air Ltd. 7. I ndeeco. 8. International Environmental Corporation. 9. Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation. 10. Marley Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 11. McQuay International. 12. Ouellet Canada Inc. 13. QMark Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 14. Rosemex Products. 15. Trane. 16. USA Coil & Air. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Description: A factory- assembled and - tested unit complying with ARI 440. C. Coil Section Insulation: Glass -fiber insulation; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be aluminum -foil facing to prevent erosion of glass fibers. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Thermal Conductivity (k- Value): 0.26 Btu x in. /h x sq. ft. at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. Fire - Hazard Classification: Maximum flame - spread index of 25 and smoke - developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM. E 84. 4. Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. D. Cabinet: Steel with baked - enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Architect. 1. Recessing Flanges: Steel, finished to match cabinet. 2. Control Access Door: Key operated. 3. Extended Piping Compartment: 8- inch -wide piping end pocket. 4. False Back: Minimum 0.0428 -inch- thick steel, finished to match cabinet. E. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Washable Foam: 70 percent arrestance and 3 MERV. 2. Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and 5 MERV. 3. Pleated: 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV. F. Hot -Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering -water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain. G. Fan and Motor Board: Removable. 1. Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor. Thermoplastic or painted -steel wheels, and aluminum, painted - steel, or galvanized -steel fan scrolls. 2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board. UNIT HEATERS 15762-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 3. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection. H. Factory, Hot -Water Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type Lcopper tube with wrought - copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service, inlet and outlet. Hose Kits: Minimum 400 -psig working pressure, and operating temperatures from 33 to 211 deg F. Tag hose kits to equipment designations. a. Length: 24 inches. b. Minimum Diameter: Equal to cabinet unit heater connection size. 2. Two - Piece, Ball Valves: Bronze body with full -port, chrome - plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600 -psig minimum CWP rating and blowout -proof stem. 3. Calibrated - Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball type, 125 -psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature; with calibrated orifice or venture, connection for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, threaded ends, and equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. 4. Y- Pattern, Hot -Water Strainers: Cast -iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B); 125 -psig minimum working pressure; with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless -steel basket, and bottom drain connection. Include minimum NPS 1/2 threaded pipe and full -port ball valve in strainer drain connection. 5. Wrought- Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection. 2.2 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Airtherm; a Mestek Company. 2. Engineered Air Ltd. 3. McQuay International. 4. Rosemex Products. 5. Ruffneck Heaters; a division of Lexa Corporation. 6. Trane. B. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in horizontal discharge configuration with adjustable discharge louvers. C. Cabinet: Removable panels for maintenance access to controls. D. Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory- assembled and - tested propeller unit heater before shipping. E. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for vertical units. UNIT HEATERS 15762-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 F. Hot -Water Coil: Test and rate hot -water propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33. Copper tube, minimum 0.025 -inch wall thickness, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering -water temperature of 325 deg F, with manual air vent. Test for leaks to 350 psig underwater. G. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi. H. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in" "Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." Motor Type: Permanently lubricated. Control Devices: Unit - mounted thermostat. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Install unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A. B. Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolatorsare specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all- thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Vibration hangers are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." D. Install wall- mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. E. Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on supply -water connection and union and calibrated balancing valve on return-water connection of unit heater. F. Install new filters in each fan -coil unit within two weeks of Substantial Completion. G. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. H. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. I. Connect piping to cabinet unit heater's factory, hot -water piping package. Install the piping package if shipped loose. UNIT HEATERS 15762-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 J. Connect supply and return ducts to cabinet unit heaters with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." K. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995. L. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." M. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 15762 UNIT HEATERS 15762-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 15763 - FAN -COIL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fan -coil units and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In the Fan -Coil -Unit Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 DUCTED FAN -COIL UNITS A. Description: Factory- packaged and - tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995. B. Coil Section Insulation: 1 /2- inchthick coated glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071 FAN -COIL UNITS 15763-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916. 1. Fire - Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum flame - spread index of 25 and smoke - developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. C. Drain Pans: Plastic. Fabricate pans and drain connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1 -2004. D. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture, with baked - enamel finish and removable access panels. E. Cabinets: Steel with baked - enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color. 1. Supply -Air Plenum: Sheet metal plenum finished and insulated to match the chassis. 2. Dampers: Galvanized steel with extruded -vinyl blade seals, flexible -metal jamb seals, and interlocking linkage. F. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Pleated Cotton - Polyester Media: 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV. G. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch, rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering -water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain. H. Belt- Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single -speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the cabinet. Aluminum or painted -steel wheels, and painted -steel or galvanized - steel fan scrolls. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type Lcopper tube with wrought - copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service, inlet, and outlet. 1. Two -way, modulating control valve for heating coil. 2. Hose Kits: Minimum 400 -psig working pressure, and operating temperatures from 33 to 211 deg F. Tag hose kits to equipment designations. a. Length: 24 inches. b. Minimum Diameter: Equal to fan - coil -unit connection size. 3. Two -Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full -port, chrome - plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600 -psig minimum CWP rating and blowout -proof stem. 4. Calibrated - Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball type; 125 -psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature; with calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, FAN -COIL UNITS 15763-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 threaded ends, and equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. 5. Automatic Flow- Control Valve: Brass or ferrous -metal body; 300 -psig working pressure at 250 deg F; with removable, corrosion - resistant, tamperproof, self - cleaning piston spring; factory set to maintain constant indicated flow with plus or minus 10 percent over differential pressure range of 2 to 80 psig. 6. Y- Pattern Hydronic Strainers: Cast -iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B); 125 -psig working pressure, with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless - steel basket, and bottom drain connection. Include minimum NPS 1/2 hose -end, full -port, ball -type blowdown valve in drain connection. 7. Wrought- Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fan -coil units to comply with NFPA 90A. B. Verify locations of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 64 inchesabove finished floor. C. Install new filters in each fan -coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion. D. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows: 1. . Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 2. Connect piping to fan - coil -unit factory hydronic piping package. Install piping package if shipped loose. 3. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste. a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction. E. Connect supply and return ducts to fan -coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. FAN -COIL UNITS 15763-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 15763 FAN -COIL UNITS 15763-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 15764 - CONVECTION HEATING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hydronic baseboard radiators. 1.2 SUBMITTALS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HOT -WATER BASEBOARD RADIATORS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Embassy Industries, Inc. 2. Haydon Corporation, Inc. 3. Riffling, a div. of Hydro -Air Components. 4. Rosemex. 5. Slant/Fin. B. Performance Ratings: Rate baseboard radiators according to Hydronics Institute's "I =B =R Testing and Rating Standard for Baseboard Radiation." C. Heating Elements: Copper tubing mechanically expanded into flanged collars of evenly spaced aluminum fins resting on polypropylene element glides. One end of CONVECTION HEATING UNITS 15764-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 tube shall be belled. D. Enclosures: Minimum 0.0329 -inch- thick steel, removable front cover. E. Rust - Resistant Enclosures: Minimum 0.040 -inch- thick ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 galvanized - steel, removable front cover. 1. Full- height back. 2. Full- length damper. 3. End panel. 4. End caps. 5. Inside and outside corners. 6. Valve access door. 7. Joiner pieces to snap together. 8. Finish: Baked - enamel finish in manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect. 9. Element Brackets: Primed and painted steel to support front panel and element. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BASEBOARD RADIATOR INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install baseboard radiators according to Guide 2000 - Residential Hydronic Heating. C. Install enclosure continuously around corners, using outside and inside comer fittings. D. Join sections with splice plates and filler pieces to provide continuous enclosure. E. Install access doors for access to valves. F. Install enclosure continuously from wall to wall. G. Terminate enclosures with manufacturer's end caps except where enclosures are indicated to extend to adjoining walls. H. Install valves within reach of access door provided in enclosure. I. Install air -seal gasket between wall and recessing flanges or front cover of fully recessed unit. J. Install piping within pedestals for freestanding units. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section " Hydronic Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. CONVECTION HEATING UNITS 15764-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Connect hot -water units and components to piping according to Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping." 1. Install shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and balancing valve on outlet. C. Install control valves as required by Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Control." D. Install piping adjacent to convection heating units to allow service and maintenance. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace convection heating units that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above. 1_4i I *K91A&IJASML97ZilM —l! CONVECTION HEATING UNITS 15764-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. B. Related Sections: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound - control devices, duct - mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 2. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. U 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop- fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static - pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. METAL DUCTS BGCE 15815-1 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 9. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire -rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. C. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings. D. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static - pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2 -1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC METAL DUCTS 15815-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2 -2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static - pressure class unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. C. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches in diameter with butt - welded longitudinal seams. D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3 -6, "Conical Tees," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." METAL DUCTS 15815-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. C. Carbon -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D. Stainless -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 26, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article. E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one -side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. Where black- and galvanized -steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface - burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame- spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke - developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two -Part Tape Sealing System: 1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic /silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 4 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static - Pressure Class: 10 -inch wg, positive and negative. METAL DUCTS 15815-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. C. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g /L. 7. Maximum Static - Pressure Class: 10 -inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single- component, acid - curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. F. Round Duct Joint O -Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm /100 sq. ft. at 1 -inch wg and shall be rated for 10 -inch wg static - pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O -ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double- lipped, EPDM O -ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory- fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium - plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all- thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc - chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5 -1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5 -2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium - plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic - locking and METAL DUCTS 15815-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO clamping device. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self- tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air - handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop - fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non -fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1 -1/2 inches. K. Where ducts pass through fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." METAL DUCTS 15815-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two -part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static - pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible ": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply -Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2 -Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2 -Inch wg: Seal Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2 -Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2 -Inch wg: Seal Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 12. Conditioned Space, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." METAL DUCTS 15815-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder- actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder- actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder- actuated concrete fasteners for standard - weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder- actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight- aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder- actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5 -1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5 -2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull- out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." 3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel. B. Supply Ducts: Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units: METAL DUCTS 15815-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 a. Pressure Class: Positive 1 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. C. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 1 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. D. Outdoor -Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1 -inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. E. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 2. Stainless -Steel Ducts: a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. 3. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum. F. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius -to- diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius -to- diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4 -4, "Vane Support in METAL DUCTS 15815-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO Elbows." C. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius -to- diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius -to- diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio and two vanes. C. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 3. . .Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius -to- Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3 -1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90- degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius -to- diameter ratio and three segments for 90- degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius -to- diameter ratio and four segments for 90- degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius -to- diameter ratio and five segments for 90- degree elbow. 4) Radius -to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. b. Round Elbows, 12 inchesand Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. C. Round Elbows, 14 inchesand Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. G. Branch Configuration: Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4 -6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45- degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3 -5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3 -6, METAL DUCTS 15815-10 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90- degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. C. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45- degree lateral. END OF SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS 15815-11 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Smoke dampers. 6. Flange connectors. 7. Turning vanes. 8. Duct - mounted access doors. 9. Flexible connectors. 10. Flexible ducts. 11. Duct accessory hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. C. Control damper installations. d. Fire - damper and smoke - damper installations, including sleeves; and duct - mounted access doors. e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with AMCA 500 -D testing for damper rating. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed - Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. C. Stainless -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts. D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1 -side bright finish for exposed ducts. E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless -steel ducts. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Duro Dyne Inc. 5. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 6. Lloyd Industries, Inc. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 9. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 10. Ruskin Company. 11. SEMCO Incorporated. 12. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Description: Gravity balanced. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm. D. Maximum System Pressure: 1 -inch wg. E. Frame: 0.052- inch - thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange. F. Blades: Multiple single -piece blades, center - pivoted, maximum 6 -inch width, 0.025 - inch- thick, roll- formed aluminum with sealed edges. G. Blade Action: Parallel. H. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. I. Return Spring: Adjustable tension. J. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings. K. Accessories: 1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring- assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Chain pulls. 4. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve. a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 -gage minimum. b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum. 5. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. 6. Screen Material: Galvanized steel Aluminum. 7. Screen Type: Bird. 8. 90- degree stops. 2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. C. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. METALAIRE, Inc. f. Nailor Industries Inc. g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. h. Ruskin Company. L Trox USA Inc. j. Vent Products Company, Inc. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 a. Hat - shaped, galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 -inch minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded corners. C. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design. C. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized Stainless - steel, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. C. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. METALAIRE, Inc. f. Nailor Industries Inc. g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. h. Ruskin Company. i. Trox USA Inc. j. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: Hat - shaped, 0.10- inch - thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design. C. Stiffen damper blades for stability. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 d. Roll- Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10- inch -thick aluminum sheet. e. Extruded - Aluminum Blades: 0.050- inch -thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. C. Jackshaft: 1. Size: 1 -inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized -steel pipe rotating within pipe- bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple- damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple- damper assembly. D. Damper Hardware: 1. Zinc - plated, die -cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32- inch -thick zinc - plated steel, and a 3/4 -inch hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating -rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Duro Dyne Inc. 5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 6. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 7. Lloyd Industries, Inc. 8. M &I Air Systems Engineering; Division of M &I Heat Transfer Products Ltd. 9. McGill AirFlow LLC. 10. METALAIRE, Inc. 11. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc. 12. Nailor Industries Inc. 13. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 14. Ruskin Company. 15. Vent Products Company, Inc. 16. Young Regulator Company. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO B. Frames: 1. Angle shaped. 2. Galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. 3. Mitered and welded corners. C. Blades: 1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches. 2. Parallel- and opposed -blade design. 3. Galvanized steel. 4. 0.064 inch thick. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 5. Blade Edging: Closed -cell neoprene edging. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals. D. Blade Axles: 1/2- inch - diameter; galvanized steel; blade - linkage hardware of zinc - plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. E. Bearings: 1. Molded synthetic. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. McGill AirFlow LLC. 6. METALAIRE, Inc. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 9. PHIL, Inc. 10. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 11. Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc. 12. Ruskin Company. 13. Vent Products Company, Inc. 14. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO C. Fire Rating: 1 -1/2 and 3 hours. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille where blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll- formed, 0.034- inch -thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking comers. E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field- installed, galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inchthick, as indicated, and of length to suit application. 2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper -frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements. F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated G. Blades: Roll- formed, interlocking, 0.034- inch - thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full - length, 0.034- inch - thick, galvanized -steel blade connectors. H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless -steel closure spring. Heat - Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg Frated, fusible links. 2.6 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. PHIL, Inc. 6. Ruskin Company. B. General Requirements: Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL. C. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single -point connection. D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille where blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll- formed, 0.034- inch -thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking comers. E. Blades: Roll- formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034- inch - thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full - length, 0.034- inch - thick, galvanized -steel blade connectors. F. Leakage: Class I . DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 G. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions. H. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- installed, 0.052- inch - thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application with factory- furnished silicone calking. Damper Motors: two- position action. J. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections. 3. Permanent - Split- Capacitor or Shaded -Pole Motors: With oil- immersed and sealed gear trains. 4. Spring- Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral - spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x IV. 5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor -Air Intakes: Equip with O -ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F. 6. Nonspring- Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x Ibf. 7. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz. K. Accessories: 1. Auxiliary switches for signaling. 2. Test and reset switches, damper mounted. 2.7 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Description: Add -on, factory- fabricated, slide -on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. C. Material: Galvanized steel. D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 0 2.8 TURNING VANES PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. SEMCO Incorporated. 5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil- shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous -glass fill. C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible "; Figures 4 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows." D. Vane Construction: Single wall. 2.9 DUCT - MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 5. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 6. McGill AirFlow LLC. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 9. Ventfabrics, Inc. 10. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Duct - Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible "; Figures 7 -2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7 -3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for 10 DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 duct pressure class. C. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1 -by -1 -inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. C. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. d. Access Doors Larger than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. C. Pressure Relief Access Door: 1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Door: Single wall with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class. 3. Operation: Open outward for positive - pressure ducts and inward for negative - pressure ducts. 4. Factory set at 10 -inch wg. 5. Doors close when pressures are within set -point range. 6. Hinge: Continuous piano. 7. Latches: Cam. 8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber. 9. Insulation Fill: 1- inch - thick, fibrous -glass or polystyrene -foam board. 2.10 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Flame Gard, Inc. 3. 3M. B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL. C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528 -inch carbon steel. D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall. E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease- tight, high- temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F. F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10 -inch wg, positive or negative. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-10 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Materials: Flame- retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip [3 -1/2 inches] [5 -3/4 inches] wide attached to 2 strips of 2 -3/4 -inch- wide, 0.028 -inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 -inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz. /sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 Ibf /inch in the warp and 360 Ibf /inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. F. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle -iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4 -inch movement at start and stop. 2.12 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-11 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Flexible Duct Connectors: 1. Clamps: Stainless -steel band with cadmium - plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm -gear action Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. 2. Non -Clamp Connectors: Adhesive Liquid adhesive plus tape Adhesive plus sheet metal screws. 2.13 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct - insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless -steel accessories in stainless -steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts. E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-12 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor -air intakes and mixed -air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. 6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors; and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 7. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes. 8. Control devices requiring inspection. 9. Elsewhere as indicated. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. J. Access Door Sizes: 1. One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two -Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. K. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. M. For fans developing static pressures of 5 -inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. N. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12- inchlengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. O. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 60- inchlengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. P. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive liquid adhesive plus tape adhesive plus sheet metal screws. Q. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. R. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4 -inch movement during start and stop of fans. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-13 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat - response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. END OF SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-14 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS 17_1:4 aQel:11Z1:4ZT_A 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Centrifugal wall ventilators. 2. Ceiling- mounted ventilators. 3. In -line centrifugal fans. 1.2 SUBMITTALS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. 4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA- Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA - Certified Ratings Seal. 2.1 CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers POWER VENTILATORS 15838-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corporation. 2. Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd. 3. American Coolair Corporation. 4. Ammerman; Millennium Equipment. 5. Breidert Air Products. 6. Broan - NuTone LLC. 7. Broan - NuTone LLC; NuTone Inc. 8. Carnes Company. 9. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 10. Hartzell Fan Incorporated. 11. JencoFan. 12. Loren Cook Company. 13. PennBarry. 14. W.W. Grainger, Inc.; Dayton Products. B. Housing: Heavy -gage, removable, spun - aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venturi inlet cone. C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward - inclined blades. D. Accessories: Wall Grille: Ring type for flush mounting. 2.2 CEILING - MOUNTED VENTILATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Coolair Corporation. 2. Ammerman; Millennium Equipment. 3. Breidert Air Products. 4. Broan - NuTone LLC. 5. Broan - NuTone LLC; NuTone Inc. 6. Carnes Company. 7. FloAire. 8. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 9. JencoFan. 10. Loren Cook Company. 11. PennBarry. 12. W.W. Grainger, Inc.; Dayton Products. B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service. POWER VENTILATORS 15838-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Grille: Plastic, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing. E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug -in. 2.3 IN -LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corporation. 2. American Coolair Corporation. 3. Ammerman; Millennium Equipment. 4. Breidert Air Products. 5. Carnes Company. 6. FloAire. 7. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 8. Hartzell Fan Incorporated. 9. JencoFan. 10. Loren Cook Company. 11. Madison Manufacturing. 12. PennBarry. 13. Quietaire Inc. B. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting. C. Belt -Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing. D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub. E. Accessories: Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections. 2.4 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections. POWER VENTILATORS 15838-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Certify sound -power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, 'Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA - Certified Ratings Seal. B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA - Certified Ratings Seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. B. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers spring hangers spring hangers with vertical -limit stops having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration - control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. POWER VENTILATORS 15838-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal - overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 7. Disable automatic temperature - control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 8. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature - control operators. 9. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust belt tension. B. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. C. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. D. Lubricate bearings. END OF SECTION 15838 POWER VENTILATORS 15838-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall- mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static - pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: - 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS A. Adjustable Bar Grille : 1. Available Manufacturers: a. A -J Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek Company. C. Carnes. d. Dayus Register & Grille. e. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div. f. Krueger. g. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc. h. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. i. Price Industries. j. Titus. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 k. Tuttle & Bailey. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 3. Face Blade Arrangement: Adjustable horizontal spaced 1/2 inch apart. 4. Frame: 1 -1/4 incheswide. 5. Mounting: Countersunk screw. 6. Accessories: Front -blade gang operator. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling- Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 15900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory- wired controls. B. See Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operation" for requirements that relate to this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each control device indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Schematic flow diagrams. 2. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. 3. Details of control panel faces. 4. Damper schedule. 5. Valve schedule. C. Software and firmware operational documentation. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Honeywell International Inc.; Home & Building Control. 2. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group. 3. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 4. Trane; Worldwide Applied Systems Group. B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems. C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token - passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point- and -click graphics. i J12 4 111FAZY&O161 21 1106] 14 : I Z K A. Unitized, capable of stand -alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient 1/0 capacity for the application. 1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72 -hour battery backup. 2. Operating System: Manage 1/0 communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling with real -time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. 3. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. 2.4 ANALOG CONTROLLERS A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10 -stage type, with heavy -duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor. B. Electric, Outdoor -Reset Controllers: Remote -bulb or bimetal rod - and -tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg F, and single- or double -pole contacts. C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone- bridge - amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote - resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO control readjustment potentiometer. 2.5 TIME CLOCKS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. ATC- Diversified Electronics. 2. Grasslin Controls Corporation. 3. Paragon Electric Co., Inc. 4. Precision Multiple Controls, Inc. 5. SSAC Inc.; ABB USA. 6. TCS /Basys Controls. 7. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc. 8. Time Mark Corporation. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Seven -day, programming- switch timer with synchronous- timing motor and seven -day dial; continuously charged, nickel- cadmium - battery- driven, eight -hour, power - failure carryover; multiple- switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day with two normally open and two normally closed output contacts. C. Solid- state, programmable time control with 4 separate programs each with up to 100 on -off operations; 1- second resolution; lithium battery backup; keyboard interface and manual override; individual on- off-auto switches for each program; 365 -day calendar with 20 programmable holidays; choice of fail -safe operation for each program; system fault alarm; and communications package allowing networking of time controls and programming from PC. 2.6 ELECTRONIC SENSORS A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. B. Thermistor. Temperature Sensors and Transmitters: Available Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. Ebtron, Inc. C. Heat -Timer Corporation. d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. e. MAMAC Systems, Inc. f. RDF Corporation. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg Fat calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless -steel socket with minimum insertion length of 2 -1/2 inches. 7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. a. Set -Point Adjustment: Exposed. b. Set -Point Indication: Exposed. C. Thermometer: Exposed. 8. Outside -Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless -steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. C. RTDs and Transmitters: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. MAMAC Systems, Inc. C. RDF Corporation. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 incheslong; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required. 6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2- 1/2 inches. 7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. a. Set -Point Adjustment: Exposed. b. Set -Point Indication: Exposed. C. Thermometer: Exposed. 8. Outside -Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless -steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. D. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. General Eastern Instruments. C. MAMAC Systems, Inc. d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp. e. TCS /Baays Controls. f. Vaisala. 2. Static - Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO expected input, and temperature compensated. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. C. Building Static - Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25 -inch wg. d. Duct Static - Pressure Range: 0- to 5 -inch wg. 3. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless -steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150 -psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 4. Water Differential- Pressure Transducers: Stainless -steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150- psigoperating pressure and tested to 300 -psig; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 5. Differential- Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot -duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential. 6. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas or liquid service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA. E. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 1. Set -Point Adjustment: Exposed. 2. Set -Point Indication: Exposed. 3. Thermometer: Exposed. 2.7 STATUS SENSORS A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential- pressure switch with pilot -duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to 5 -inch wg. B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential - pressure switch with pilot -duty rating and with adjustable pressure - differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump. C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current - sensing fixed- or split -core transformers with self - powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current. D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600 -V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single -loop, self - powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full -scale accuracy. E. Power Monitor: 3 -phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20 -mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor. F. Current Switches: Self- powered, solid -state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements. G. Electronic Valve /Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10 -V dc, feedback signal. H. Water -Flow Switches: Bellows- actuated mercury or snap- acting type with pilot -duty HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 rating, stainless -steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. Available Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. 2.8 THERMOSTATS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Erie Controls. 2. Danfoss Inc.; Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration Div. 3. Heat -Timer Corporation. 4. Sauter Controls Corporation. 5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc. 6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc. B. Electric, solid- state, microcomputer -based room thermostat with remote sensor. 1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. 4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days. 5. Short -cycle protection. 6. Programming based on every day of week. 7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24 -hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, and fan on -auto. 8. Battery replacement without program loss. 9. Thermostat display features include the following: a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. C. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time. e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. g. System mode indications include "heating," 'off," "fan auto," and "fan on." C. Low - Voltage, On -Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24 -V, bimetal- operated, mercury- switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set -point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set -point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential. D. Line - Voltage, On -Off Thermostats: Bimetal- actuated, open contact or bellows - actuated, enclosed, snap- switch or equivalent solid -state type, with heat anticipator; listed for electrical rating; with concealed set -point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set -point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors. 2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on- off -auto. E. Remote -Bulb Thermostats: On -off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. 2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields. 3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple -unit elements, extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported. 4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of instrument. 5. On -Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by application. 6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument. F. Fire - Protection Thermostats: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction; with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75 deg F above normal maximum operating temperature, and the following: 1. Reset: Manual. 2. Reset: Automatic, with control circuit arranged to require manual reset at central control panel; with pilot light and reset switch on panel labeled to indicate operation. G. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: 1. Set -Point Adjustment: Exposed. 2. Set -Point Indication: Exposed. 3. Thermometer: Exposed. H. Room thermostat accessories include the following: 1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls. 2. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws. 3. Set -Point Adjustment: 1/2 -inch- diameter, adjustment knob. Immersion Thermostat: Remote -bulb or bimetal rod - and -tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point. Airstream Thermostats: Two -pipe, fully proportional, single- temperature type; with adjustable set point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug -in test fitting or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element. K. Electric, Low -Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap- acting, single -pole, single- throw, manual - or automatic- reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below set point. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet. 2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface. L. Electric, High -Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap- acting, single -pole, single- throw, manual - or automatic- reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or above set point. 1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet. 2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface. M. Heating /Cooling Valve -Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, with molded - rubber diaphragm, remote -bulb liquid - filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum shutoff pressure of 25 psig, and cast housing with position indicator and adjusting knob. ✓ UITI& Lola I to] :1K A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two- position action. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." 2. Permanent Split- Capacitor or Shaded -Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring- return motors with integral spiral- spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer. 3. Nonspring -Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2 -1/2: Size for running torque of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x Ibf. 4. Spring- Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2 -1/2: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x Ibf. 5. Nonspring- Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x Ibf. 6. Spring- Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x Ibf. B. Electronic Actuators: Direct - coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full- stroke cycles at rated torque. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. 2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. 3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: a. Parallel -Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed -Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. C. Parallel -Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed -Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3 -Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 to 2500 fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5. Dampers with 3- to 4 -Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0. 4. Coupling: V -bolt and V- shaped, toothed cradle. 5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation- sensing circuitry. 6. Fail -Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring- return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on nonspring- return actuators. 7. Power Requirements (Two- Position Spring Return): 24 -V ac. 8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24 -V ac or 8 W at 24 -V dc. 9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10 -V do or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10 -V do position feedback signal. 10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg . 11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F. 12. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed. 2.10 CONTROL VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div. 2. Erie Controls. 3. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. 4. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. 5. Neles- Jamesbury. 6. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Skinner Valve Division. 7. Pneuline Controls. 8. Sauter Controls Corporation. B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. C. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics: NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure. 2. NIPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug -type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc. 3. Sizing: 3- psigmaximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following: D. Butterfly Valves: 200 -psig, 150 -psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast - iron or ASTM A 536 ductile -iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless -steel stem, field- replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 1. Body Style: Wafer. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Disc Type: Nickel- plated ductile iron. 3. Sizing: 1 -psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. E. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends. 1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Sizing: 3 -psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff head. 3. Flow Characteristics: Two -way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three -way valves shall have linear characteristics. F. Self- Contained Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. Thermostatic Operator: Wax - filled integral sensor with integral adjustable dial. 2.11 DAMPERS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div. 3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.). 4. United Enertech Corp. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Dampers: AMCA- rated, opposed -blade design; 0.108 -inch- minimum thick, galvanized -steel or 0.125 -inch- minimum thick, extruded- aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064 -inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches. 1. Secure blades to 1/2 -inch- diameter, zinc - plated axles using zinc - plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade - linkage hardware of zinc - plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring - stainless -steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed -cell neoprene. 4. Edge Seals, Low - Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and spring- loaded stainless -steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 -inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x Ibf; when tested according to AMCA 500D. 2.12 CONTROL CABLE A. Electronic and fiber -optic cables for control wiring are specified in Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling." HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-10 NJ BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 64 inchesabove the floor. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. B. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations: 1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated. C. Install automatic dampers according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures. E. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." F. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15 Section " Hydronic Piping." G. Install duct volume - control dampers according to Division 15 Sections specifying air ducts. H_ Install electronic and fiber -optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling." 3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section 'Raceways and Boxes." B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling." 1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-11 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number -code or color -code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables. 7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. D. Connect manual -reset limit controls independent of manual - control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers. E. Connect hand - off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks. B. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-12 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant - volume air systems. 2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Constant -flow hydronic systems. b. Variable -flow hydronic systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step -by -step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. B. Certified TAB reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow - control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system -effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality- control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. Examine terminal units, such as variable- air - volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. K. Examine three -way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. L. Examine heat - transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. M. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. N. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step -by -step procedures. B. Complete system- readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical -power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature - control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air - pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 -2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing." B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to it the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 15 Section "HVAC Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper - control positions, valve position indicators, fan - speed - control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" duct layouts. C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct - airflow measurements. D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air dampers through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. H. Check for airflow blockages. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. Check for proper sealing of air - handling -unit components. K. Verify that air duct. system is sealed as specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts." 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT - VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. Measure total airflow. a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. C. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air - handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air - handling and - treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured. 4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat - recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system -effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 6. Obtain approval from Construction Manager for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Sections for air - handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air - handling -unit performance. 7. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan -motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full - cooling, full- heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. 3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Measure terminal outlets using a direct - reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch - circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check liquid level in expansion tank. 3. Check makeup water- station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow- control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential - pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive - displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump -motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow - balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive - displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from Construction Manager and comply with requirements in Division 15 Section " Hydronic Pumps." TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head - capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload conditions. 3. Verify pump -motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design. B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed. C. Measure flow at all pressure- independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed. D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components. that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow - pressure -drop relationship may be used as a flow- indicating device. F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, Voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor -air temperature. Measure the differential - pressure - control -valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three -way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat - exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 hydronic systems. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal- protection - element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable- Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS A. Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving -water temperatures and water flow. 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT - TRANSFER COILS A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil: 1. Entering- and leaving -water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop. A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Heating -Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3.13 REPORTING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: Prepare weekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.14 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field -report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor -, return -, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. C. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable- air - volume systems. g. Settings for supply -air, static - pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single -line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. 3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near -peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950-10 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 16010 -- ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further for instructions and be governed by the requirements contained there under. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and materials, unless otherwise specified, necessary for the installation of complete electrical systems as required by the specifications and as shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the completion of those details of electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems. B. Work Not Included Certain labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished under other sections of these specifications, by Utility Companies or by the Owner; when this is the case, the extent, source, and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings or as described in the specification. 1.03 PROVISIONS A. Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, the electrical drawings, and all items hereinafter specified. 1. Prior to any work being performed under this division, examine architectural, structural, civil, and mechanical drawings and specifications. If any discrepancies occur between them and the electrical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. 2. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the electrical work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 3. Coordinate the electrical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of the same. Coordinate electrical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 4. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner's agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. 5. In acceptance or rejection of installed electrical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The latest editions of the following standards (including supplements and official interpretations) are minimum requirements: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 72 — National Fire Alarm Code. 3. NFPA 101 — Life Safety Code. 4. NFPA 110 —Emergency Power Systems 5. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 7. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 8. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. 9. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 10. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). 11. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 12. International Building Code (IBC). 13. International Mechanical Code (IMC). 14. International Fire Code (IFC). 15. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 16. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). B. The complete installation shall comply with requirements of the utility and telephone companies furnishing service to this installation. The drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, statutes, or ordinances in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take precedence when they are more stringent or conflict with the drawings and specifications. 1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install ". "Furnish" means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application. "Install" means to join, unit, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation. The words "accept" or "acceptable" denote only that the equipment items are in general conformance with the design concept of the project. B. Drawings: ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches, panelboards and other work. Information shown on the drawings is schematic, however, re- circuiting will not be permitted without specific acceptance. Drawings and specifications are complementary to each other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Data presented on these drawings is accurate as planning can be determined, but accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, locations, levels, etc., to suit field conditions is directed. Review all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications; adjust all work to conform to all conditions shown therein. The Architectural drawings shall take precedence over all other drawings. 2. Discrepancies between different plans, between plans and specifications, between specifications or regulations and codes governing this installation shall be brought to the attention of the Architect in writing before the date of bid opening. In the event such discrepancies exist, and the Architect is not so notified, the adjudication of responsibility shall be solely at the discretion of the Architect. 1.06 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Engineer for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. Failure to request clarification during the bid period of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of their responsibilities. The signing of the contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of the full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. 1.07 PERMITS, FEES & NOTICES A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, inspections and certificates that may be necessary for the full completion of the work. Furnish the Architect with a certificate of final inspection and approval from the AHJ over the electrical installation. B. Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections required by applicable codes, rules and regulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Furnish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 1.08 TESTS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Upon completion of all work and adjustment of all equipment, provide complete operational tests of all electrical equipment provided under this division. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Guarantee that all work governed by this division shall be free of defects in workmanship, materials and parts for a period of one (1) year after written acceptance. Promptly repair, revise, and replace defects as directed with no additional cost to the Owner (lamps and fuses are exempt). 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain a current set of electrical drawings at the site. Neatly mark all changes and deviations from the original drawings. Use a color which contrasts with the prints. This shall be a separate set of drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be kept up to date as the job progresses and shall be made available for inspection by the Architect at all times. These updated progress drawings shall be used to produce the final record drawings that shall be in AutoCad electronic format media upon project completion. B. Upon completion of the contract, both sets (electronic and hard copy drawings) of record drawings shall be delivered to the Architect. C. The Contractor shall mark all record drawings on the front lower right hand corner with a stamp impression that reads `RECORD DRAWINGS' or similar. 1.11 PROJECT /SITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of job and ascertain all conditions affecting the proposed installation and adjust all work accordingly. Make provisions for these costs. C. Coordinate the work with that of all other trades. Where conflicts of work occur and departure from the indicated arrangements are necessary, consult with other Contractors involved; come to agreement as to changed locations and elevations, etc., and obtain written acceptance from the Architect of proposed changes before proceeding with work. D. All outages of electrical service shall be scheduled with the Owner and Utility Company five (5) days in advance of proposed outage. Include an overtime allowance in the bid for the performance of all work requiring outages at such time as it is approved by the Owner. Outages shall be at a time and of such duration as accepted by the Owner. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. 1.13 USE OF THE ARCHITECT'S AND /OR ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall obtain, at the Contractor's expense, from the Architect or Engineer a set of AutoCAD or compatible format architectural and engineering drawings on electronic media where desired by the Contractor and /or required by the Specifications for use in preparing the shop drawings, coordination drawings, and record drawings. The Contractor shall provide to the Architect and Engineer a written release of liability acceptable to the Architect and Engineer prior to receiving the electronic media. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.01 STANDARD FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All electrical materials shall be acceptable for installation only if labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities. 2.02 SUBMITTALS A. -Submit under provision of Division 1. B. Listing of Equipment: The Contractor shall submit, within thirty days after the award of the contract, a complete typewritten list of those items of equipment which will be furnished under this contract. Include the name or description of the item, name of manufacturer, model, type, and catalog number. C. Present shop drawing submittal data at one time, bound in three -ring binders, indexed in a neat and orderly manner. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Do not begin work until (1) copy is returned. D. Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings, layouts, manufacturer's data, wiring diagrams and material schedules that may be requested by the Architect for his review. The review by the Architect will not constitute concurrence with any deviation from the plans and specifications unless such deviations are specifically identified by the method described below, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the submitted data. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 E. Processed shop drawings shall not be construed as change orders. The shop drawings shall demonstrate that the Contractor understands the design concept, indicate which equipment and materials he intends to provide, and detail the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and the design drawings and specifications are discovered, the design drawings and specifications shall govern. F. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions (which he shall confirm and correlate at the job site), fabrication processes and techniques of construction and coordination of his work with that of other trades. The Contractor shall check and verify all measurements and review shop drawings before submitting them and sign a statement on the shop drawings which signifies that they comply with plans and specifications and that equipment is dimensionally suitable for the application. If any deviations from the specified requirements for any item of material or equipment exist, such deviation shall be expressly stated in writing and incorporated with the submittal. The Owner's copies (two of each) of the reviewed submittals shall be retained by the Contractor until completion of the project and presented in bound form to the Owner. G. Provide, with shop drawing submittal, 1/4" scale.layout drawings of room with switchboards, transformers, telephone backboards, panelboards, and data equipment. Layouts shall show locations of, and shall be coordinated with mechanical equipment. Equipment shall be drawn to scale. 2.03 BID ALTERNATE(S) A. Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. B. Altemate(s) for Material and Equipment 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive altemate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid alternates at the time the base bids are due. 2.04 SUBSTITUTION AND APPROVALS (Prior Approvals) A. Prior to Bidding: Where items of equipment or materials are specified by a manufacturer's name, type, model, or catalog number, only those items may be used in the base bid unless prior written acceptance of other material has been published by addendum. 1. Submit applications for this review in triplicate at least ten (10) calendar days prior to bid opening. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-6 BGCE VAIL, CO 2. Applications for review shall be accompanied by a typewritten list of the specified manufacturer and catalog number and shall state all significant details in which each items differs from the item specified. Failure to list this information shall not relieve the Contractor from providing properly functioning or fitting materials regardless of the review action taken by the Architect. The Contractor will provide only materials which have been specified or accepted prior to bid opening, under his base bid. 3. Equipment and materials not listed as equivalents may be proposed as deductive alternates to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 4. Such substitution proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Substitution proposal must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be deducted for each item. If any such substitutions are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed substitution items within 14 days of award of contract. The request for proposed substitutions shall not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concerns. FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO B. Substitutions of Material after Award of Contract PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Other items of material and equipment may be offered (at the Contractor's option) as alternates to specified items, either as provided for in the Proposal Forms or, if no provisions are made, by submitting it with his bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such alternate proposal shall not be included under the base bid and must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. If any such alternate material proposals are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items in accordance with the requirements of "Review of Proposed Substitutions ". 0 2.05 SUBSTITUTIONS (CONTRACTOR AND /OR OWNER INITIATED) A. Materials or equipment listed by several manufacturers' names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed manufacturers may be used in the base bid. Materials or equipment not listed are considered substitutions. B. Performance Specification: When any item is specified by requirement to meet a performance, industry or regulating body standard or is specified generically (no manufacturer's name listed), no prior review by the Consulting Electrical Engineer is needed unless specifically called for in these specifications. C. Contractor to be responsible for any changes and costs to accommodate any equipment except the first named in the specification. D. Substitutions for Material Equipment and materials not listed as equivalents may be proposed as deductive alternates to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item to the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS BGCE 16010-7 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 2. Such substitutions shall not be substituted for the base bid and must be accompanied by a full description of the difference between the Contract Document requirements and that of the substitution, the comparative features of each, and the effect of the change on the end result performance. Include the impact of all changes on other contractors and acknowledge the inclusion of additional costs to the other trades. If any such alternates are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items within 14 days of award of contract. Late requests for proposed substitutions will not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concerns. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION A. Contractor's personnel and subcontractors selected to perform the work shall be well versed and skilled in the trades involved. B. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components. C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing -in the building. D. Any changes or deviations from the drawings and specifications must be accepted in writing by the Architect/Engineer. All errors in installation shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. All specialties shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Where detail or specific installation requirements are not provided, manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed. E. Upon completion of work, all equipment and materials shall be installed complete, thoroughly checked, correctly adjusted, and left ready for intended use or operation. All work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all residue shall be removed from surfaces. Exterior surfaces of all material and equipment shall be delivered in a perfect, unblemished condition. F. Contractor shall provide a complete installation, including all required labor, material, cartage, insurance, permits, and taxes. A. Order the progress of electrical work to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. Any cost resulting from defective or ill -timed work performed under this Section shall be borne by this Contractor. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.03 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Perform all trenching and backfilling required by work performed under this Section in accordance with the excavating and grading specifications as herein specified. This work shall comply with the requirements of Table 300 -5 of the National Electrical Code. B. Excavate trenches to the depth required for the utilities involved. The trench bottom shall be graded true and free from stones or soft spots. Trenches through specially treated or surfaced areas, such as paving or blacktop, shall have the width of the surface cutting extended for a width of eight inches (8 ") on each side of the open trench. Unless otherwise noted, the disturbed surfaces shall be replaced equal to the original construction, to the original grade with the same type of material, and to the same depths and limits as the materials removed. After acceptance by the Architect, backfill, tamp, and compact to insure against the possibility of differential settling, in conformity with Division 2 Specifications. Verify location of existing or new utilities and, if damaged by this Contractor, replace or repair. 3.04 CHASES, OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to eliminate where possible, cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roofs. Any damage to the building, structure, piping, ducts, equipment or any defaced finish shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Architect. Any necessary cutting, channeling, drilling or anchoring of raceways, outlets, or other electrical equipment shall be performed in a careful manner, and as accepted by the Architect. B. All openings made in fire -rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a manner to conform to the fire rating for the surface penetrated. C. All penetrations required through existing concrete construction shall be core drilled at minimum size required. Precautions shall be taken when drilling to prevent damage to structural concrete. Contractor shall obtain permission from the Architect before proceeding with drilling. D. Provide all cutting, trenching, backfilling, patching and refinishing or resurfacing required for electrical work in a manner meeting the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Arrange and be held responsible for delivery and safe storage of materials and equipment for electrical installation. B. Store materials and equipment for easy inspection and checking. C. Carefully mark and store all materials. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Deliver materials to the job site in stages of the work that will expedite the work as a whole. E. Carefully check materials furnished to this Contractor for installation, and provide receipt acknowledging acceptance of delivery and condition of the materials received. Thereafter, assume full responsibility for its safekeeping until the final installation has been reviewed and accepted. 3.06 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. B. Close all conduit openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. C. Any equipment or conduit systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above "MILL" or "SHOP" conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction. 3.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are received and Owner's personnel have been thoroughly indoctrinated in the maintenance and operation of all equipment. B. Operating manual, parts lists, and indoctrination of operating and maintenance personnel: Furnish the services of a qualified representative of the supplier for each item or system itemized below who shall instruct specific personnel, as designated by the Owner, in the operation and maintenance of that item or system. C. Instruction shall be made when the particular system is complete and shall be of the number of hours indicated and at the time requested by the Owner. A representative of the Electrical Contractor shall be present for all demonstrations. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-10 BGCE VAIL, CO SYSTEM HRS. OF INSTRUCTION 1. Fire alarms stem 2 2. Lighting controls stems 2 3. Electrical distribution equipment 2 4. Engine generator 4 5. Power Monitoring 6 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-10 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 D. Deliver three (3) complete operating manuals and parts lists to the Owner (or his designated representative) at the time of the above required indoctrination. Fully explain the contents of the manuals as part of required indoctrination and instruct the Owner's personnel in the correct procedure in obtaining service, both during and after the guarantee period. The operating manual and parts lists shall give complete information as to whom the Owner shall contact for service and parts, including the address and phone number. Furnish evidence that an authorized service organization regularly carries a complete stock of repair parts for these items (or systems), and that the organization is available for service. Service shall be furnished within twenty four (24) hours after requested. E. Clean up: Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the electrical installation and leave the premises and all equipment, lamps, fixtures, etc. in a clean, orderly condition. Any costs to the Owner for clean up of the site will be charged against the Contractor. F. Acceptance Demonstration: Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by the Architect, the Contractor shall demonstrate for the Owner the operation of the entire installation, including all systems provided under this contract. G. Operating and Acceptance Tests: Provide all labor, instruments, and equipment for the performance of tests as specified. Submit three (3) copies of a typewritten test report for the Architect for his approval. 1. Record the full load current in each phase or line at the main service entrance and for each feeder leaving the main distribution panelboard. Readings shall be taken with the maximum installed load connected and in operation. 2. Perform a careful inspection of the main switchboard bus structure and cable connections to verify that all connections are mechanically and electrically tight. 3. Measure the resistance to ground for the service ground, which shall not exceed ten (10) ohms under normal soil moisture conditions. If required, install additional ground provisions in a manner accepted by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.08 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS FOR ROOFS A. Raceways penetrating roofs shall be installed in a manner to preserve the integrity of the roof. Provide flashing and counter flashing for all roof penetrations required for the work. B. Conduits routed above roofs shall be installed a minimum of twelve inches (12 ") above the finished roof surface, supported on metal stands installed with flashing and counter flashing, with maximum spacing of ten feet (10' -0 "). C. Provide weatherproof duplex receptacles on roof so that no equipment installed on the roof is more than twenty -five feet (25' -0 ") from a receptacle. Connect to nearest receptacle circuit unless indicated on plans. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS BGCE 16010-11 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.09 CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING AND POWER PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Provide all temporary facilities required to supply construction power and light. Install and maintain facilities in a manner that will protect the public and workmen. Comply with all applicable laws and regulations. B. Provide covered walkway lights and obstruction lights which shall be kept burning continuously between sunset and sunrise where required. C. Upon completion of the work, remove all temporary facilities from the site. D. Replace all lamps in permanent building lighting fixtures that have been used as lighting during construction activities. All fixtures shall have new lamps at the time of project turnover to owner. E. I The General Contractor shall pay for all power and light used by him and his subcontractors where construction power is separately metered, or is taken from the permanent project metered service solely for construction use. F. The cutoff date for power cost allocation where permanent meters are used shall be either the agreed date of occupancy by the Owner or the date of final acceptance of the project, whichever shall be the earlier date. 3.10 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING AND CONNECTIONS A. Furnish, set in place, and wire, except as indicated, all heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing, fire protection, motors and controls in accordance with the following schedule. Carefully coordinate with work performed under the Mechanical Division of these specifications. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-12 BGCE VAIL, CO SET IN PLACE WIRED FURNISHED OR MTD. CONNECTED ITEM UNDER UNDER UNDER 1. Equipment motors and thermal MD MD ED overload, resistance heaters. 3 2. Motor controllers, magnetic MD MD(a) ED starters, reduced voltage starters and overload relays. 3. Disconnect switches, fused or unfused, h.p. rated switches, ED(a) ED(a) ED thermal overload switches and fuses, manual operating switches. 4. Pushbutton stations, pilot MD MD(b) MD(b) lights, multi-speed switches, ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-12 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 float switches, thermostats, control relays, time clocks, control transformers, control panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches and interlocks. 5. Contactors,. 120V control circuit outlets for control ED ED ED panels and for boiler controls and for fire protection controls and smoke detectors. 6. Duct Detectors, Fire /Smoke MD MD ED(c) Dampers, and Elevator Vent Dampers. MD= Mechanical, Division 15. ED= Electrical, Division 16. a. If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, then wiring and connections only by ED. b. If float switches, line thermostats, p.e. switches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, the Mechanical Division shall furnish them. They shall be set in place and connected under the Electrical Division, except there where such items are an integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., they shall be set in place under the Mechanical Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the full load current to any motor, they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechanical Division. Control devices carrying FULL LOAD CURRENT furnished by Mechanical and wired by Electrical shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown on drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. 1) Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by ED; all control function wiring by MD. C. The above list does not attempt to include all components. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. B. Provide electrical connections to mechanical equipment. Refer to the Mechanical specifications and plans covering sprinkler systems, motor interlocks, switching, etc. Provide wiring, conduit, outlets and final electrical connections to all equipment. C. Where motor controllers are furnished by others, install controller and provide connections at line and load side of controllers. D. Where reduced voltage, multiple speed, duplex, triplex, lead -lag, pony motor and other unusual controller types are utilized, coordinate specific requirements of motor(s) and controller and provide required wiring between motor(s) and controller. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-13 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 E. Provide branch circuits and connections to sump and sewage ejector pump alarm bell system. Connect to emergency power distribution system. F. Where electric duct heaters are provided with remote power panels, provide branch circuits between remote panel and duct heater elements in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. G. For electric water coolers verify whether the equipment is hard wired, cord and plug connected and whether a remote chiller is provided. Provide circuiting and connections to match. 3.11 ELEVATORS A. Locate equipment and points of connection in elevator machine rooms and elevator pits in accordance with the requirements of the elevator vendor and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. Provide a fused switch or circuit breaker, dedicated 3 -phase branch circuit, and power connection for each elevator. Fused switch or circuit breaker shall be located within elevator machine room. Circuit breaker rating shall be in accordance with elevator manufacturer's requirements. C. Provide a dedicated 120V, 20A circuit with lockable disconnect switch and connection to each elevator cab for elevator cab lighting and ventilation. D. Provide a dedicated 120V, 20A circuit and connect to elevator system intercom in elevator machine room. E. Provide a dedicated circuit and connect to each elevator controller for control power. Circuit rating shall be in accordance with the elevator vendor's requirements. F. Provide a dedicated circuit for weatherproof lighting fixtures, lighting switches and duplex receptacles within each elevator pit. G. Provide a dedicated telephone outlet for each elevator. Provide and empty W raceway from each telephone outlet to the nearest telephone backboard. H. Provide empty raceways from elevator shafts to the elevator control and status panel(s). Size, quantity and location of raceway termination points shall be in accordance with the elevator vendor's requirements. I. Provide a fire alarm speaker within each elevator cab. Connect to the Fire Management System –Voice Communication System. Provide a firefighter's telephone jack in each elevator cab. Connect to Fire Management System — Firefighter's Telephone System. K. Connect power supply circuits serving elevators and related controls and accessories to the emergency power distribution system. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-14 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 L. Provide conduit and wire between elevator controllers and automatic transfer switches and make connections required for automatic recall and operation of elevators from the emergency power distribution system in the event of power failure. END OF SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-15 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Underground distribution grounding. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality - control test reports. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1 -5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. C. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches in cross section, unless otherwise indicated; with insulators. 2.02 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure -type, with at least two bolts. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic - welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.03 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel; 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet long. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. B. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch minimum, from wall 6 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus. C. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Air -Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct - mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. C. Water Heater, Heat - Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat - tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 D. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4- by- 2 -by -12 -inch grounding bus. 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal E. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch - circuit conductors. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one - rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic - welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect -type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug - type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. E. Ufer Ground (Concrete- Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, using a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. 1. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground - resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors. are connected. a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall -of- potential method according to IEEE 81. B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 500 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohms. 4. Pad - Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 5. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. 6. Telecommunications System: 5 ohms. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 16073 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. B. Design equipment supports capable , of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA -4, factory- fabricated components for field assembly. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. C. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA -4. 3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101 C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable -iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory- fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non - armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder - Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2. Mechanical- Expansion Anchors: Insert- wedge -type, zinc - coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA -4 or MSS SP -58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP -58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 50 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single -bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface - Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder- actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard - weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight- aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps complying with MSS SP -69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted - channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site - fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000 -psi, 28 -day compressive- strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast - in -Place Concrete." C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073-4 BGCE VAIL, CO L_J U FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.5 PAINTING PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field- painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing- repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 16073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS BGCE 16073-5 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Identification for raceway and metal -clad cable. 2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 3. Underground -line warning tape. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.02 COORDINATION PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY AND METAL -CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Color for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600v or Less: 1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable. C. Self- Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather - and chemical- resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 2.02 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL -CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color- Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self- adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl - cloth, self- adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 2.03 UNDERGROUND -LINE WARNING TAPE A. Description: Permanent, bright - colored, continuous - printed, polyethylene tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct - burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line. a. Inscriptions for Red - Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. b. Inscriptions for Orange - Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE. A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self- Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure- sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.05 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 2.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark -gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 318 inch. B. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch. 2.07 CABLE TIES A. General Purpose: 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb, minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color- coding. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self- tapping, stainless -steel screws or stainless -steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self- Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self - adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. System Identification Color- Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color- coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two -color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50 -foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25 -foot maximum intervals in congested areas. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general - purpose type, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV- stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. H. Underground -Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground -line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches overall. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways and Metal -Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A: Identify with orange self- adhesive vinyl label within 12 inches of junction boxes and /or cabinets. B. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with color- coded, self- adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands: C. BG Designer Note: Edit per Project requirements. 1. Fire Alarm System: Red. 2. Fire - Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. 3. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue. 4. Security System: Blue and yellow. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. 6. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow. 7. Control Wiring: Green and red. D. Power- Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 1/0 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use marker tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above. E. Branch - Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use marker tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number. F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source and circuit number. G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field- installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory- installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. H. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground -line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground - line warning tape for both direct - buried cables and cables in raceway. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self- adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. 2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. J. Instruction Signs: it 1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. 2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8 -inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer. K. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2 -inch- high letters on 1 -1/2 -inch- high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchboards. d. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. e. Disconnect switches. f. Enclosed circuit breakers. g. Motor starters. h. Push -button stations. i. Power transfer equipment. j. Contactors. k. Remote - controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. I. Power - generating units. m. Voice and data cable terminal equipment. n. Television /audio components, racks, and controls. o. Fire -alarm control panel and annunciators. p. Monitoring and control equipment. q. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for signal and control functions. Mrllc� Z1.�1F,l4W_II to] ZI A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self- Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two -color markings in contact, side by side. G. Color- Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch - circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit, field applied. 2. Colors for 208/120 -V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. 3. Colors for 480/277 -V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 c. Phase C: Yellow. 4. Field - Applied, Color- Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half - lapped turns for a minimum distance of 2 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. H. Underground -Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground -line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 9 painting Sections. END OF SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for cabling used for voice and data circuits. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Field quality - control test reports. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Set sleeves in cast -in -place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN -THWN. C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal -clad cable, Type MC, mineral - insulated, metal- sheathed cable, Type MI and Type SO with ground wire. 2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory- fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.03 SLEEVES FOR CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast -Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138 -inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application. D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." 2.04 SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion - resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 1 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 1 AWG and larger. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN -THWN, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN -THWN, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN- THWN, single conductors in raceway or Metal -clad cable, Type MC. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on- Grade, and Underground: Type THHN -THWN, single conductors in raceway. E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN -THWN, single conductors in raceway or Metal -clad cable, Type MC. F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on- Grade, and Underground: Type THHN -THWN, single conductors in raceway. G. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Metal -clad cable, Type MC. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer - approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire /cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Hangers and Supports" F. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. 3.05 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core - drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. 2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. E. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces. G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. J. Interior Penetrations of Non - Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." K. Fire - Rated - Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." Roof - Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot -type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. M. Aboveground Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. N. Underground Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.06 SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal underground exterior -wall penetrations. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.07 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire- resistance rating of assembly according to Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. All feeders rated below 600 volts shall be megger tested between phase conductors and between phase conductors and ground, using a 1,000 -volt megger. Tests shall be made upon completion of all connections, splices, and insertion of all over current devices. Test shall indicate freedom from short circuits and grounds. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES BGCE 16120-5 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing. C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Custom enclosures and cabinets. 2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following: a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. b. Frame and cover design. C. Grounding details. d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling -in and lifting irons. e. Joint details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. PVC - Coated Steel Conduit: PVC - coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. EMT: ANSI C80.3. D. FMC: Zinc - coated steel. E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Fittings for EMT: Die -cast, set -screw or compression Gland type. 2. Coating for Fittings for PVC - Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. G. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity. 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. ENT: NEMA TC 13. B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC -40 -PVC, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. 2.03 METAL WIREWAYS A. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold -down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. C. Wireway Covers: Hinged type. D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.04 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap -on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Thomas & Betts Corporation. b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.05 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. B. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover. C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. E. Cast -Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover. F. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous -hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. G. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized -steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 2.06 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray for concrete and Green for fiberglass. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have closed bottom, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper- resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC. ". B. Polymer- Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer- Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two. C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass- reinforced polyester resin, with covers of fiberglass. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 2.07 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast -Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138 -inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application. D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section 'Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: RNC, Type EPC-40 -PVC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC -40 or 80 -PVC, direct buried, unless noted to be concrete - encased on drawings. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R or 4. 6. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring: a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off - Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating. b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer- concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating. C. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light -Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass- reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000 -lbf vertical loading. B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes raceways in the following locations: a. Trash enclosures. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet - handling units. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO C. Mechanical rooms. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor - Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: Plenum -type, optical fiber /communications cable raceway. 8. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser -type, optical fiber /communications cable raceway. 9. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT. 10. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 -inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer. E. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot - .water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." E. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90- degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Run conduit larger than 1 -inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Change from ENT to, rigid steel conduit, before rising above the floor. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 -lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 3/4 -Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1 -Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90- degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. N. Expansion -Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight -run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install expansion -joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 C. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change. 3. Install each expansion -joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation. 0. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. P. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Q. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. R. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct -Buried Conduit: 1. Install conduits a minimum of 24 inches below finished grade. 2. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 3. Install backfill as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 4. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie -in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct - buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2 -inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure. E. Field -cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.05 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core - drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 1. For sleeve cross - section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. 2. For sleeve cross - section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. E. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. Interior Penetrations of Non - Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. K. Fire - Rated - Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." L. Roof - Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot - type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. M. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. N. Underground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.06 SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.07 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire- resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 1. Repair damage to galvanized manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES BGCE PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by paint finishes with matching touchup coating 16130-10 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 16231 - PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged engine - generator sets for emergency power supply with the following features: 1. Diesel engine. 2. Unit - mounted cooling system. 3. Unit - mounted control and monitoring. 4. Outdoor enclosure. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter. B. LP: Liquid petroleum. C. MTBF: Mean time between failures. D. MTTR: Mean time to repair. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include manufacturer's model numbers, rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following: 1. Thermal damage curve for generator. 2. Time - current characteristic curves for generator protective device. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings and weights of engine - generator set, system cabinet, batteries, and all major and minor auxiliary equipment. 2. Fact Sheets giving ratings, heat load, exhaust, ventilation, MTBF, MTTR, and other pertinent data. 3. Single line diagram of proposed system. 4. A description of the diagnostic system, procedures, and monitory capabilities. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-1 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 5. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases. 6. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights. 7. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 8. System load efficiency curve showing efficiency variation in KVA or as a percentage of base rating from no load to 100 percent load. 9. A clear statement in the bid of any proposed deviations from the specification. 10. Itemized bill of materials. C. Qualification Data: For installer and manufacturer. D. Source quality- control test reports. 1. Certified summary of prototype -unit test report. 2. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads. 3. Report of sound generation. 4. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 5. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110. E. Field quality - control test reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: List of tools and replacement items recommended being stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than three hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: The complete system shall be engineered, fabricated, tested, delivered, and warranted by a qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-2 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Comply with ASME B15.1, Safety Standard for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus. F. Comply with NFPA 37, Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines. G. Comply with NFPA 70. H. Comply with NFPA 110 (Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems) requirements for a Class 6, Type 10, Level 2 emergency power supply system. I. Comply with UL 2200. J. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements. K. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements 50dBA for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling -air intake and discharge, and other components of installation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Engine - generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 8200 feet. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators and remote radiators mounted on grade. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR BGCE 16231-3 Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 1.07 WARRANTY PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: One for every 10-of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion -air filters. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Onan /Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. (Basis of Design) 2. Caterpillar; Engine Div. 3. Kohler Co.; Generator Division. 2.02 ENGINE - GENERATOR SET A. Factory- assembled and - tested, engine - generator set. B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-4 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator -set center of gravity. C. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Power Output Ratings: 60 KVA at 0.8 power factor. 2. Output Voltage: 208 volts line -to -line and 120 volts line -to- neutral. 3. Frequency: 60 Hz. 4. Output Connections: Three - phase, four wire. 5. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of component. D. Generator -Set Performance: 1. Steady -State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load. 2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step -load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady -state operating band within three seconds. 3. Steady -State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load. 4. Steady -State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady -state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed. 5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step -load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady -state operating band within five seconds. 6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent. 7. Sustained Short- Circuit Current: For a 3- phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full -load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components. 8. Start Time: 10 seconds per NFPA 110. 2.03 ENGINE A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF -2. B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm. C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four -Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm. D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid: 1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-5 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail -safe. 3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances. E. Engine Fuel System: 1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions. 2. Relief- Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source. 3. Water separator. F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric - immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system, sized to maintain engine temperature between 100 and 120 degrees F and suitable for operation on 120VAC. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity. G. Governor. H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine - generator -set mounting frame and integral engine -driven coolant pump. 1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene - glycol -based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. 2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition. 3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed -loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock. 4. Temperature Control: Self- contained, thermostatic - control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer. 5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging -, ultraviolet -, and abrasion - resistant fabric. a. Rating: 50 -psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and noncollapsible under vacuum. b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements. 1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz. 2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is complete shall be 60 dBA or less. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-6 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 J. Air - Intake Filter: Heavy -duty, engine- mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry- filter element and "blocked filter' indicator. K. Starting System: 24 -V electric, with negative ground. 1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine- cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. 2. Cranking Motor: Heavy -duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding. 3. Cranking Cycle: 60 seconds. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging. 5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid - resistant finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place. 7. Battery- Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid -state voltage regulation and 35 -A minimum continuous rating. 8. Battery Charger: Current - limiting, automatic - equalizing and float- charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features: a. Size: for Level 2 installations, the charger shall be sized to provide a 100 percent charge to fully discharged starting batteries within 24 hours. b. Operation: Equalizing- charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float - charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again. C. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures. d. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent. e. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates. f. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or do output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery- charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel. g. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall- mounted cabinet. it PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-7 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 2.04 FUEL OIL STORAGE PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Base - Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel oil tank. Features include the following: 1. Tank level indicator. 2. Capacity: Fuel for eight hours' continuous operation at 100 percent rated power output. 3. Vandal- resistant fill cap. 4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.05 CONTROL AND MONITORING A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode - selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote - control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode - selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator -set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency -stop switch also shuts down generator set. B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator -set vibration. Wall- Mounting Cabinet Construction: Rigid, self- supporting steel unit complying with NEMA ICS 6. Power bus shall be copper. Bus, bus supports, control wiring, and temperature rise shall comply with UL 891. C. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 2 system, and the following: 1. AC voltmeter, for each phase, or a phase selector switch. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine - coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating -oil pressure gage. 7. Running -time meter. 8. Ammeter - voltmeter, phase - selector switch(es). 9. Generator - voltage adjusting rheostat. ( +/- 5% voltage adjustment) 10. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 11. Fuel tank high -level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 12. Generator overload. E PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-8 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 D. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated. E. Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C dry contacts, for each alarm and status indication is reserved for connections for data -link transmission of indications to remote data terminals. Data system connections to terminals are covered in Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control." F. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel. 1. Overcrank shutdown. 2. Coolant low- temperature alarm. 3. Control switch not in auto position. 4. Battery- charger malfunction alarm. 5. Battery low- voltage alarm. G. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush - mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated. H. Remote Emergency -Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation. Motor /generator set shall have provisions to interface with 120V emergency OFF power source terminated at two (2) designated terminals in the system cabinet which shall cause the input and output circuit breakers of the motor /generator set to open, completely.isolating the M/G set from all sources of power. 2.06 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded -case, thermal- magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489. 1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. 2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. B. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded -case, electronic -trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489. 1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long -time and short-time delay and instantaneous. 2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-9 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. C. Ground -Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for ground - fault. Integrate ground -fault alarm indication with other generator -set alarm indications. 2.07 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR A. Comply with NEMA MG 1. B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor. C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F. D. Stator - Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required. E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. F. Enclosure: Drip proof. G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure. H. Voltage Regulator: Solid -state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output - voltage operating band. 2.08 OUTDOOR GENERATOR -SET ENCLOSURE A. Description: Vandal- resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure. 1. Enclosure shall conform to sound emission requirements. B. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions. 1. Louvers: Fixed - engine, cooling -air inlet and discharge. Storm -proof and drainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-10 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling -air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating. 2.09 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water - resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized - steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Material: Standard neoprene. 2. Durometer Rating: 50. 3. Number of Layers: Three. B. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open- spring isolators with seismic restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory- drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4- inch- thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2.10 FINISHES A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion - resistant pretreatment and compatible primer. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine - generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories. 1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115. B. Project - Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine - generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests: PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-11 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability. 2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Transient and steady -state governing. 6. Single -step load pickup. 7. Safety shutdown. C. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine - generator performance. B. Examine roughing -in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine - generator installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Comply with packaged engine - generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110. B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance. C. Install packaged engine generator with restrained spring isolators having a minimum deflection of 1 inch on 4 -inch- high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Concrete base construction is specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." D. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Flexible connectors and steel piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping." Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a shutoff valve, stainless -steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with welded joints. Flexible connectors and piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping." E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-12 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.03 CONNECTIONS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. B. Connect fuel, cooling- system, and exhaust - system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector. D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" and Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. After installation of equipment, the equipment manufacturer shall provide the services of a competent engineer to check the wiring between all pieces of equipment, start up and the system, and field test all functions, interlocks and protective devices to ensure that the total system is functioning according to the intent of the design. 2. The field test shall be performed under the supervision of a factory- trained representative of the equipment manufacturer and witnessed by the Owner's Representative. Results of the field test shall be on standard test report forms. The certified field test report shall be submitted upon completion of the test. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection (except those indicated to be optional) for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single -step full -load pickup test. a. The installed system shall be load tested for a continuous 8 -hour period by means of 0.08 power factor load banks. The system shall be continuously tested at Y2 load for two hours, 3 / load for two hours, and full load for four hours. The equipment manufacturer shall provide resistive load banks of total kW load of equipment to facilitate start up under loaded conditions, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-13 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 and to conduct load test described above. Instrument reading shall be recorded every ' / hour. 3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages. a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full- charging and float - charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and speck gravity under both conditions. b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery. C. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications. 4. Battery- Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float - charging conditions. 5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine - generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks. 6. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step -load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified. 7. Harmonic - Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits. 8. Noise Level Tests: Measure A- weighted level of noise emanating from generator -set installation, including engine exhaust, enclosure, and cooling -air intake and discharge, at four locations on the property line, and compare measured levels with required values. Locations selected shall represent points sensitive to noise levels. C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switch and run them concurrently. D. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request. E. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-14 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. At least 1 session, minimum 4 hours each shall be held at the Owner's site to demonstrate the operation and maintenance of the system and explain the O&M manuals to the Owner's Representative(s). END OF SECTION 16231 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR 16231-15 BGCE Vail, CO SECTION 16441 - SWITCHBOARDS FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. 2. Transient voltage suppression devices. 3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 4. Instrumentation. 5. Control power. 6. Accessory components and features. 7. Identification. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. C. ' RFI: Radio - frequency interference. D. RMS: Root mean square. E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, ground -fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment. 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. C. Short- circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices. d. Utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company. SWITCHBOARDS BGCE 16441-1 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 e. Listing for series rating of installed devices. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. g. Include time - current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log -log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality - control test reports including the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 3. Time - current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E. B. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Comply with NEMA PB 2, "Deadfront Distribution Switchboards." F. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path. SWITCHBOARDS 16441-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. C. Handle switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1 and NECA 400. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift -out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place. B. Environmental Limitations 1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 8200 feet. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each size and type, but no fewer than 2 of each size and type. 2. Control -Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each size and type, but no fewer than 2 of each size and type. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each size and type, but no fewer than 3 of each size and type. 4. Indicating Lights: Equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each size and type, but no fewer than 1 of each size and type. SWITCHBOARDS 16441-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 1. Manufacturers: a. Eaton Corporation; Cutler- Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D. B. Front - Connected, Front - Accessible Switchboard: Fixed, individually mounted main device, panel- mounted branches, and sections rear aligned. 1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted. 2. Branch Devices: Fixed, individually mounted. C. Nominal System Voltage: 208Y/120 V. D. Main -Bus Continuous: 2000 A. E. Indoor Enclosure: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1. F. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory- applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust- inhibiting primer on treated metal surface. G. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections. H. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated compartment and section complying with utility company's requirements. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard. I. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard. J. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments. K. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Phase- and Neutral -Bus Material: Hard -drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity or tin - plated, high- strength, electrical -grade aluminum alloy. a. If bus is aluminum, use copper- or tin - plated aluminum for circuit - breaker line connections. SWITCHBOARDS 16441-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 b. If bus is copper, use copper for feeder circuit - breaker line connections. 2. Ground Bus: 1/4 -by -2 -inch- minimum -size, hard -drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with pressure connectors for feeder and branch - circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run. 3. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated. 4. Main Phase Buses, Neutral Buses, and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends. 5. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus -bolt tightness. 6. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses, unless otherwise indicated, equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus are braced. L. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit - breaker compartment. 2.03 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal- Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time- current element for low -level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit - breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front - mounted, field- adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic trip -unit circuit breakers shall have RMS sensing, field- replaceable rating plug, and the following field- adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. C. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and I response. 4. External handle shall be suitable for locking in the OFF position. 5. Silver alloy contacts with auxiliary arc - quenching device. 6. Main circuit breaker shall be UL listed for continuous operation at 100% rated load. B. Molded -Case Circuit - Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air - conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. SWITCHBOARDS 16441-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. Ground -Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -to -test feature, and ground -fault indicator. 4. Shunt Trip: 120 -V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage. 2.04 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A. Furnish portable test set to test functions of solid -state trip devices without removal from switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and switchboard class relays. 2.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Mimic Bus: Continuously integrated mimic bus factory applied to front of switchboard. Arrange in single -line diagram format, using symbols and letter designations consistent with final mimic -bus diagram. Coordinate mimic -bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which they are applied. Produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchboard components and connections. B. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1. B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1 and NECA 40. SWITCHBOARDS 16441-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Install and anchor switchboards level on concrete bases, 4 -inch nominal thickness. 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 2. For switchboards, install epoxy- coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components. D. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards. E. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation. 1. Set field- adjustable switches and circuit - breaker trip ranges. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field- installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with engraved metal or laminated - plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion - resistant screws. C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: SWITCHBOARDS 16441-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field- adjustable circuit - breaker trip ranges as indicated. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service. 3.08 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. 3.09 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 16441 SWITCHBOARDS 16441-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch - circuit panelboards. 3. Load centers.] 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. C. RFI: Radio - frequency interference. D. RMS: Root mean square. E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. C. Short- circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. e. Label designation for each panelboard. PANELBOARDS 16442-1 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time - current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of panelboards and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. Comply with NEMA PB 1. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: B. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m). PANELBOARDS 16442-2 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 1.06 COORDINATION PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories: a. Eaton Corporation; Cutler- Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D. 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface- mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. b. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface - mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush- mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover for Panelboards: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Loadcenter doors shall be one piece bolt on front with a lockable hinged door over the overcurrent protection devices. 5. Skirt for Surface- Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 6. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion - resistant treatment or primer coat. 7. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside panelboard door. PANELBOARDS 16442-3 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO B. Phase and Ground Buses: PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Material: Tin - plated aluminum [Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.] 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch - circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box. C. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Tin - plated aluminum 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type. 4. Connectors shall be sized for feeder terminations as indicated on electrical single line diagram. 5. Feed - Through Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. D. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main service disconnect switches. 2.03 PANELBOARD SHORT - CIRCUIT RATING A. NRTL label indicating series - connected rating with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices. Include size and type of upstream device allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series - connected short- circuit rating. 2.04 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike. B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. For Circuit - Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt -on circuit breakers. 2. For Circuit - Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt -on circuit breakers; plug -in circuit breakers where individual positive - locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 3. Fused switches. 2.05 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH- CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards: NEMA PB1, lighting and appliance branch - circuit type. B. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. PANELBOARDS 16442-4 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 C. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.06 LOAD CENTERS A. Load Centers: Comply with UL 67. B. Residential use only. C. Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug -in, full - module circuit breaker. D. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral, and ground lugs and buses. 2.07 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with series - connected rating to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal- Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time - current element for low -level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit - breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A ground - fault protection (6 -mA trip). 3. Ground -Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground - fault protection (30 -mA trip). 4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with 5 or 30 -mA trip sensitivity as indicated on drawings. 5. Arc -Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240 -V, single -pole configuration. 6. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. a. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. b. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air - conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. C. Ground -Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -to -test feature, and ground -fault indicator. d. Shunt Trip: 120 -V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage. e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit. f. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit - breaker handle in on position. PANELBOARDS 16442-5 BGCE Vail, CO ST CHAIR L, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Mount top of trim 78 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field- adjustable switches and circuit - breaker trip ranges. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. F. Stub four 1 -inch (27 -GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1 -inch (27 -GRC) empty conduits below slab not on grade. G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. H. Paint load center electrostatically to match adjacent surface color. I. Comply with NECA 1. PANELBOARDS BGCE 16442-6 Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field - installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated - plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion - resistant screws. D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. . Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. PANELBOARDS 16442-7 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field - adjustable circuit - breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination." 3.07 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.08 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS 16442-8 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts 2. Emergency lighting units 3. Exit signs 4. Lighting fixture supports B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for occupancy sensors PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. BF: Ballast factor. B. CRI: Color- rendering index. C. CU: Coefficient of utilization. D. HID: High - intensity discharge. E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Division 1 and 16010 General Provisions for approved substitution methods. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. a. Height b. Aperture size C. Reflector material d. Diffuser material e. Housing material gauge INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-1 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast: Dimming Ballast must have letter of certification from manufacturer indicating compatibility with control system and lamp type. 4. Energy - efficiency data. 5. Life, output, and energy - efficiency data for lamps. B. Installation Instructions C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery- powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining four years. 2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast Batteries: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining four years. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-2 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. B. Lamps 1. General Electric 2. Philips 3. Osram Sylvania C. Ballasts 1. Advance 2. Lutron 3. General Electric 4. Osram Sylvania 5. Bodine 2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. C. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. INTERIOR LIGHTING BGCE 16511-3 Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. G. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. H. Factory- Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T -4, T -5, T -8, T -12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. C. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. 2.3 BALLASTS FOR T8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with UL 935 and ANSI C82.11; programmed start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi -level control is indicated. 1. Sound Rating: Class A. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 3. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 4. BF: 0.88 or higher. 5. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed -start ballasts. C. Electronic Programmed -Start Ballasts for T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-4 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 D. Ballasts for Residential Applications: Fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low- power- factor electronic ballasts having a Class B sound rating and total harmonic distortion of approximately 30 percent. 2.4 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS A. Electronic Ballast for Metal - Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F for single -lamp ballasts. 2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F. 3. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit. 4. Sound Rating: A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 8. Power Factor: .90 or higher. 9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio - frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 10. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. B. Pulse Start Electronic Ballast for Metal - Halide Lamps: 1. Sound Rating: A 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent C. Auxiliary Instant -On Quartz System: Factory- installed feature automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when power outages occur. System automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output. 2.5 EXIT SIGNS A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Wire Guard: Heavy- chrome - plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Low - Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-5 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Linear Fluorescent low- mercury lamps, CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4 -Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 HID LAMPS A. High- Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900 K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum. 1. Dual -Arc Tube Lamps: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and, when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower internal pressure, lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output. B. Pulse -Start, Metal - Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K for lamps over 400W. 2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints" for channel- and angle -iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2 -inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin -Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2 -inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc - coated steel, 12 gage. E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage. F. Rod Hangers: 3/16 -inch minimum diameter, cadmium - plated, threaded steel rod. G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking -type plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-6 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire. C. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid -Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support element. 1. Install a minimum of two ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4 -inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. 4. Install at least two independent support rods or wires from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3. D. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem - Mounted, Single -Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin -stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. For fixtures exceeding 50 pounds, provide secondary means of support. E. Verify ceiling construction and furnish appropriate ceiling mount supports, hardware, trim and accessories for each luminaire. F. Where utilized as raceways, luminaires shall be suitable for use as raceways. Provide feed through spice boxes where necessary. G. Provide installation and supporting hardware including stems, plates, plaster frames, hangers, and similar items, for support of luminaires for the ceiling construction in which they shall be installed. Provide plaster frames made of non ferrous metal, or of steel that has been suitably rustproofed after fabrication. H. Attach reflectors to housing by means of safety chains to prevent reflectors from falling. No part of the chain shall be visible after installation. HID luminaires connected to the emergency power system shall have an integral quartz lamp instant restrike system to provide light output immediately after a loss of power to the luminaire. The instant lamp shall automatically turn off after the HID lamp has restriked. Provide additional feed point in pendant mounted luminaires connected to the emergency power system or provided with integral battery packs to accommodate the addition al wiring. K. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-7 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 L. Replace all lamps at temporary certificate of operation. M. Fixtures requiring a fire rated enclosure may be provided with one of the following methods: 1. Field built tent enclosure 2. Manufacturer provided - listed for use with that specific fixture 3. EZ barrier listed for use with that specific fixture 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to emergency power and retransfer to normal. B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-8 BGCE Vail, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 16521 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Luminaire- mounted photoelectric relays. 3. Poles and accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. CRI: Color- rendering index. B. HID: High - intensity discharge. C. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. D. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination. E. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Division 1 and 16010 General Provisions for approved substitution methods. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters. a. Height b. Aperture size C. Reflector material d. Diffuser material EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 e. Housing material gauge 2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories. a. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. 6. Ballasts, including energy - efficiency data. 7. Lamps, including life, output, and energy - efficiency data. 8. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 9. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for components involved. 10. Anchor bolts for poles. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Anchor -bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. C. Field quality- control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." D. Comply with NFPA 70. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Store poles on decay- resistant - treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation. y> A C. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS A. In the Exterior Lighting Fixture Schedule, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis of Design Product: The design of each item of exterior luminaire and its support is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. C. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. D. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 E. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets:. Use heat- and aging- resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. F. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory- assembled and - tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. G. Factory- Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T -4, T -5, T -8, T -12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. C. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. 2.3 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS A. Low- Temperature Ballast Capability: Rated by its manufacturer for reliable starting and operation of indicated lamp(s) at temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher. B. Ballast Characteristics: 1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 2. Sound Rating: A. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy- saving, high power factor, Class P, automatic -reset thermal protection. 5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum. 6. Transient - Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 Category A or better. C. Low - Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast provided at temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher. D. Fluorescent Lamps: Low - mercury type. Comply with the EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 0 2.4 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open- circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Electronic ballast compatible with lamp type. 2. Ballast Circuit: Constant - wattage autotransformer or regulating high- power- factor type. 3. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F. 4. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. B. Auxiliary, Instant -On, Quartz System: Factory- installed feature automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. System automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent of light output. 2.5 HID LAMPS A. Metal - Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. B. Pulse -Start, Metal - Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. C. Ceramic, Pulse -Start, Metal- Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K. 2.6 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS -4. B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless -steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion - resistant items compatible with support components. 1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, unless stainless -steel items are indicated. 3. Anchor -Bolt Template: Plywood or steel. D. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole -base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." EXTERIOR LIGHTING BGCE 16521-5 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 2.7 STEEL POLES PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig; 1 -piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall. Shape: Round, tapered. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation. B. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2 -inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole. 2.8 POLE ACCESSORIES A. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and nuts. Finish same as pole. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources. 3.2 POLE INSTALLATION A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole. B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: 1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches. 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet. 3. Trees: 15 feet. C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 D. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6 -inch- wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab. Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel to a level 1 inch below top of concrete slab. E. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable). 3.3 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at bollard location. Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 3.4 GROUNDING A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source. END OF SECTION 16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 16714 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Telecommunications mounting elements. 2. Backboards. 3. Telecommunications service entrance pathways. 4. Grounding. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Related Sections: 1. Division 16 Section "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 2. Division 16 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Equipment racks and cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections. 3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail. C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision of Commercial Installer, Level 2. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as Commercial Installer, Level 2 to perform the on -site inspection. COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 16714-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA- 569 -A. D. Grounding: Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install equipment frames and cable trays until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier. 1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. 2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross - connects, and patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment. 2.1 PATHWAYS A. Cable Support: NRTL labeled. Cable support brackets shall be designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. Cable tie slots fasten cable ties to brackets. 1. Comply with NFPA 70 and UL 2043 for fire- resistant and low- smoke - producing characteristics. 2. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. 3. Lacing bars, spools, J- hooks, and D -rings. 4. Straps and other devices. B. Cable Trays: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cable Management Solutions, Inc. COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 16714-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 b. Cablofil Inc. C. Cooper B -Line, Inc. d. Cope - Tyco /Allied Tube & Conduit. e. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 2. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors; constructed from 3/8" x 1 -1/2" x .065" rectangular tube steel, black finish. a. Ladder Cable Runways: Nominally 12 incheswide, and a rung spacing of 12 inches. C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section 'Raceways and Boxes." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. 1. Outlet boxes serving one or two connectors shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2 -1/2 inches deep. 2. Outlet boxes serving more than two connectors shall be no smaller than a standard double -gang outlet box, 2 -1/2 inches deep. 2.2 BACKBOARDS A. Backboards: Plywood, fire- retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry." 2.3 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar: 1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression -type wire terminals, and long- barrel, two -bolt connection to ground bus bar. 2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 1/4 inch thick by 4 inches wide with 9/32 - inch holes spaced 1 -1/8 inches apart. 3. Stand -Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. C. Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. 2.4 LABELING A. Comply with TIA/EIA -606 -A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. PART 3 - EXECUTION COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 16714-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Contact telecommunications service provider and arrange for installation of demarcation point, protected entrance terminals, and a housing when so directed by service provider. B. Install underground pathways complying with recommendations in TIA/EIA- 569 -A, "Entrance Facilities" Article. 1. Install underground entrance pathway complying with Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms. C. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA- 569 -A -7. D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." B. Comply with TIA/EIA- 569 -A, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2 -inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 16714-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA- 606 -A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." B. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section 'Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire- resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA -606 -A for Class 2 level of administration. D. Labels shall be preprinted or computer - printed type. END OF SECTION 16714 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 16714-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 16714-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 16716 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pathways. 2. UTP cable. 3. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross - connects. 4. Cabling identification products. 1.2 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross - connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone -to- backbone cross - connection. B. Backbone cabling cross - connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner. 2. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. 3. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following: a. Cross - connects. 4. Cross - connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components. C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 16716-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 field inspector. D. Source quality - control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling Administration Drawings by a BICSI - certified Level 2 Installer. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. B. Surface- Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame- Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke - Developed Index: 50 or less. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA- 569 -A. E. Grounding: Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATHWAYS A. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 5e cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. 2. Lacing bars, spools, J- hooks, and D- rings. 3. Straps and other devices. B. Conduit: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 16716-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 2.2 UTP CABLE PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division. 2. Berk -Tek; a Nexans company. 3. CommScope, Inc. 4. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT. 5. Superior Essex Inc. B. Description: 100 -ohm, multi -pair UTP, formed into 25 -pair binder groups covered with a gray thermoplastic jacket. 1. Comply with ICEA S -90 -661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2, Category 5e. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR or CMP, complying with UL 1666. 2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Leviton Voice & Data Division. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Tyco Electronics /AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. 4. Commscope, Inc. 5. Ortronics*/ Legrand. B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA -568- B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch -down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. C. Connecting Blocks: 110 -style IDC for Category 5e. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated. D. Cross - Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. E. Factory-made, 4 -pair cables in [36 -inch] [48 -inch] <Insert length >lengths; terminated with 8- position modular plug at each end. 2.4 GROUNDING COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 16716-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA/EIA -606 -A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. B. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1. C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2. D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider. 3.2 WIRING METHODS A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 16 Section 'Raceways and Boxes." B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 16716-4 BGCE VAIL, CO C7 2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits 3 inchesabove finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA- 569 -A. B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Division 16 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings. C. Comply with TIA/EIA -569 -A for pull -box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. D. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section 'Raceways and Boxes" for installation of conduits and wireways. E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long- radius elbows whenever possible. F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1. PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110 -style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross - connects, and patch panels. 5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice n COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING BGCE 16716-5 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold- Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10 -foot- long service loop on each end of cable. 11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. D. Open -Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inchesapart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. F. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA -569 -A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2 -1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 16716-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." B. Comply with TIA/EIA- 569 -A, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.6 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2 -inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA- 606 -A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 1. Administration Class: 2. Color -code cross - connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels. B. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire- resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA -606 -A for Class 2 level of administration. D. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 16716-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project. E. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration -point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. F. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building- mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. 4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building- mounted device with name and number of particular device as shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. 5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable- terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. G. Labels shall be preprinted or computer - printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA 606 -A, for the following: 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color- coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 3. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross - connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA- COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 16716-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 568 -13.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. B. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. C. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 16716 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING BGCE 16716-9 VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO SECTION 16717 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pathways. 2. UTP cabling. 3. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross - connects. 4. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 5. Cabling identification products. 6. Cabling administration system PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 B. Related Sections: 1. Division 16 Section "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 1.2 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross - connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols. 1. TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors be installed for each work area. 2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more that one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross - connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector. 3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 16717-1 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software. 3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. 4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following: a. Cross - connects. 5. Cross - connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components. 6. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following: C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. D. Source quality - control reports. E. Field quality- control reports. F. Maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. -1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. B. Surface- Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame- Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke - Developed Index: 50 or less. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA- 569 -A. E. Grounding: Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 16717-2 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATHWAYS PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. 2. Lacing bars, spools, J- hooks, and D- rings. 3. Straps and other devices. B. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. 1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2 -1/2 inches deep. 2.2 Outlet boxes serving more than two connectors shall be no BACKBOARDS A. Backboards: Plywood, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. 2.3 UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division. 2. Berk -Tek; a Nexans company. 3. CommScope, Inc. 4. Superior Essex Inc. B. Description: 100 -ohm, 4 -pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket. 1. Comply with ICEA S -90 -661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2, Category 5e. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. 2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 2. Leviton Voice & Data Division. 3. Panduit Corp. 4. Tyco Electronics /AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. 5. CommScope, Inc. 6. Ortronics / Legrand. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 16717-3 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA -568- B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch -down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. C. Connecting Blocks: 110 -style IDC for Category 5e. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated. D. Cross - Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. E. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color- coded, eight - position modular receptacle units with integral IDC -type terminals. 2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET /CONNECTORS A. Jacks: 100 -ohm, balanced, twisted -pair connector; six - position modular. Comply with USOC requirements. B. Outlets: Multi -port- connector assemblies mounted in single gang faceplate. 1. .. Plastic Faceplate: High- impact plastic. Coordinate color with Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices." 2. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel, complying with requirements in Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices." 3. For use with snap -in jacks accommodating any combination of phone or television cords. 4. Legend: Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive -tape label. 2.6 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. 2.7 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA/EIA -606 -A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. B. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 16717-4 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Factory test UTP cables on reels according to TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1. C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2. D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider. 3.2 WIRING METHODS A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces, in attics, and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 16 Section 'Raceways and Boxes." B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA- 569 -A -7. B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Division 16 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings. C. Comply with TIA/EIA -569 -A for pull -box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. D. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section 'Raceways and Boxes" for installation of conduits and wireways. It E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long- radius elbows whenever possible. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 16717-5 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. 2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits 3 inchesabove finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110 -style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross - connect point. 5. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to telecommunications outlet/connectors: a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross - connect point, as a patch connection, or for direct connection to workstation equipment. b. Locate consolidation points for UTP at least 49 feet from communications equipment room. 6. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross - connects, and patch panels. 7. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 8. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 9. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 10. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 11. Cold- Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 12. In the communications equipment room, install a 10 -foot- long service loop on each end of cable. 13. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. C. UTP Cable Installation: COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 16717-6 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 1. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. D. Open -Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inchesapart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. F. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA -569 -A for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2 -1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Ratirig Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." B. Comply with TIA/EIA- 569 -A, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 16717-7 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO 3.6 GROUNDING PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI -J- STD - 607 -A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2 -inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA- 606 -A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 1. Administration Class: 2. 2. Color -code cross - connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels. B. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire- resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA -606 -A for Class 2 level of administration. D. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project. E. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration -point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA- 606 -A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner. F. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building- mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 16717-8 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building- mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. 5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable- terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. 6. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label. G. Labels shall be preprinted or computer - printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA- 606-A. 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling- terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color- coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA- 568 -13.1. 2. Visually confirm Category 5e, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. 3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross - connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA- 568 -13.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 5. UTP Performance Tests: a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1 and TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2: 1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss. 4) Near -end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near -end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal -level far -end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal -level far -end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 16717-9 BGCE VAIL, CO FIRST CHAIR VAIL, COLORADO PERMIT SET MARCH 4, 2010 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew. 6. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off- hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call. b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network. B. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.9 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable -plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets. END OF SECTION 16717 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 16717-10 BGCE VAIL, CO